AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
English
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PREPARATIONS 12
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting Zone2 speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting to the jack on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6 Preparing for connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 27
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
10 Connecting to a network wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
PLAYBACK 41
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting a registered scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S601) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Listening to DAB radio (RX-S601D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Preparing the DAB tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Displaying the DAB information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
En 3
Listening to FM radio (RX-S601D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playing back music via BLUETOOTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Playback BLUETOOTH device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
CONFIGURATIONS 84
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 103
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
En 4
APPENDIX 107
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-S601.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
DAB radio (RX-S601D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna (RX-S601) FM antenna (RX-S601)
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.
DAB/FM antenna (RX-S601D) YPAO microphone
CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide
Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-S601 (U.S.A. model), unless
otherwise specified.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within 6 m (20 ft)
En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
AV receiver (the unit)
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.122
Change the input source
and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)
. p.42
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone
. p.61
•USB
. p.66
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.69
• Internet radio
. p.72
•AirPlay
. p.64
• BLUETOOTH
. p.60
BLUETOOTH
device
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system.
Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces
in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.27
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert
halls (CINEMA DSP)
. p.44
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.47
• Playing back music in multiple rooms
. p.75
4K Ultra HD
signal and
HDCP 2.2
supported
Wireless connection to a
network
. p.24
En 7
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.20)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, portable audio player, and other
devices.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.19)
When using an
ARC
-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input
from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.44)
The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you
to create a 3-dimensional sound field that spreads up
and deep in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D).
❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed
in front (p.45)
You can enjoy the surround sound even when the
surround speakers are placed in front.
❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.47)
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit
plays back the selected source with the least circuitry,
which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.48) (RX-S601)
❑ Listening to DAB radio (p.52) and FM radio
(p.56) (RX-S601D)
❑ Low power consumption
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption and helps to create an
eco-friendly home theater system (p.96).
About
“
AV SETUP GUIDE
”
❑ Application for tablets “AV SETUP GUIDE”
AV SETUP GUIDE is an application that
assists you with cable connections
between AV receiver and source
devices as well as AV receiver setup.
This app guides you through the various
settings such as speaker connections,
TV and source device connections and
assigning the power amp.
Functions:
1) Connection support guide
– Speaker connection
– TV/source devices connection
2) Setup support guide
– Automatic network setup of HDMI, power amp
assign, etc.
– Various setup assistance with illustrations.
– YPAO setting guidance
3) View owner’s manual
* This application is for tablets only.
For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App
Store or Google Play.
About
“
AV CONTROLLER
”
❑ Application for smartphone / tablets
“AV CONTROLLER”
AV CONTROLLER provides you the
flexibility to control the available inputs,
volume, mute and power commands. It
lets users change a song from Internet
Radio, USB and command FM/AM
tuners or any other internally available
source.
Functions:
– Power on/off
– Volume up/down
–Mute
– Music Play
– Input Selection
– DSP Mode Selection
– SCENE selection
– Blu-ray player fundamental control
– Seamless control between the Yamaha AV receiver
and Blu-ray player
– Demo mode - Explains how to use this app
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App
Store or Google Play.
En 8
Front panel
1 ZONE key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75).
2 INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.79).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.34).
3 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
4 Front display
Displays information (p.9).
5 DIRECT key
Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.47).
6 INPUT knob
Select an input source.
7 z (power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
8 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.91)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.91)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.100)
• An iPod is being charged (p.61)
9 PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
0 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.27).
A STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.46).
B PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.43).
C SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.42).
D AUX jack
For connecting devices, such as portable audio players
(p.22).
E USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.66) or an iPod
(p.61).
F VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INFO (WPS)
DIRECT
V
O
L
U
M
E
ZONE
INPUT
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
(CONNECT)
BD/DVD
TV NET RADIO
AUX
SCENE
AUDI O
PROGRA
M
5V
1A
2 31
7 8
4 5
6
F9: A EDBC
En 9
Front display (indicators)
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
2 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.47) is
working.
3 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.44) or CINEMA DSP 3D
(p.44) is working.
4 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
(RX-S601) or FM radio station (RX-S601D) signal.
5 BLUETOOTH indicator
Light up while the unit is connecting to a BLUETOOTH
device.
6 PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.77)
7 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
8 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
9 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
0 ECO
Lights up when the eco mode (p.96) is enabled.
A Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
B Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.79).
C Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless signal (p.31).
D ZONE 2
Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.75).
E Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
F ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.81) is working.
12
VIRTUAL
3
CHARGE
A
ZONE
B
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2
PARTY
1
23 4
7
689
5
A0 CAB DEF
En 10
Rear panel
1 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.19). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
2 HDMI 1–6 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.20).
3 NETWORK jack
For a wired connection to a network (p.24).
4 Wireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.24).
5 Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.25).
6 AV jacks
AUDIO jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.20).
7 MONITOR OUT jack
For connecting to a TV and outputting video signals (p.19).
8 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.16).
9 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to the radio antennas (p.23).
0 SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.16).
A VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.25).
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
NETWORK
WIRELESS
AUDI O
2
AUDI O
3
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
2
AV
3
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO 1
HDMI 4 HDMI 5HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
HDCP2.2
(
NET
)
ANTENNA
AMFM
75
(
RADIO
)
HDMI 6
08 9
1
3 542
7
A
6
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to prevent
improper connections.
(RX-S601 U.S.A. model)
En 11
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
3 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
You can select directly each input source by pressing the
following keys.
HDMI 1–6 HDMI 1–6 jacks
AV 1–3 AV 1–3 jacks
AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks
FM FM radio
AM or DAB AM radio (RX-S601) or DAB radio (RX-S601D)
BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH devices
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET Network sources (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
AUX AUX jack (on the front panel)
• Input selection keys that can be selected for Zone2 are
underlined in blue.
4 MAIN/ZONE 2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.75).
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.42).
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.43).
8 SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.84).
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
790 External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET”
is selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device.
• The playback devices must support HDMI Control. However,
Yamaha does not assure the operation of all HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
• You can assign the unit's functions to the RED/GREEN/
YELLOW/BLUE keys (p.98).
0 Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source (p.48).
MEMORY Registers radio stations as presets.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
A Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.43).
B z (receiver power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
C PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.77).
D VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
E MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
F OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.80).
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YE LLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
2
4
1
5
A
7
6
8
9
0
B
D
C
F
E
3
En 12
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.13)
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.
2 Connecting speakers (p.16)
Connect the speakers to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.19)
Connect a TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.20)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5 Connecting the radio antennas (p.23)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas or DAB/FM antenna to the unit.
6
Preparing for connecting to a network
(p.24)
Connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable.
7 Connecting the power cable (p.25)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
8
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.26)
Select the desired on-screen menu language.
9
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.27)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
10 Connecting to a network wirelessly (p.31)
Connect the unit to a network wirelessly.
En 13
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout
examples.
* Place the surround speakers in front and set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can use the Zone2 function or bi-amp connections simultaneously with the 2.1- or 3.1-channel system.
1 Placing speakers
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 6-ohm speakers. When connecting 8-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “8 Ω MIN”. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.15).
• Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier.
• Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers.
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Speaker system (the number of channels)
5.1
5.1
(Virtual
CINEMA
FRONT)
4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) 1
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
●●●●●
Front (R) 2 ●●●●●
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●● ●
Surround (L) 4
Produce surround left/right channel sounds.
●●* ●
Surround (R) 5 ●●* ●
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”.
●●●●●
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 14
5.1-channel system
• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
• You can place the subwoofer either in the left or right side.
5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
• To utilize this configuration, set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
• You can place the subwoofer either in the left or right side.
3.1-channel system
2.1-channel system
45
12
39
10° to 30°10° to 30°
12
39
45
12
39
12
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 15
■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 6-ohm speakers. When connecting
8-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “8 Ω MIN”.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “8 Ω MIN”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
z (power)
STRAIGHT
1 2
PART Y
VIRTUAL
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2A
ZONE
3B
SP IMP.••6¬MIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 16
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagram provides connections for
5.1-channel system as an example. For other systems,
connect speakers while referring to the connection
diagram for the 5.1-channel system.
Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer)
5.1-channel system
■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
■ Connecting the subwoofer
(with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
2 Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.
–
+
–
+
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
12
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
FRONT
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
Audio pin cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 17
Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND/ZONE 2/BI-AMP jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.88) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting
the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• Surround speakers or Zone2 speakers cannot be used during
bi-amp connections.
• The FRONT jacks and SURROUND/ZONE 2/BI-AMP jacks output
the same signals.
Connecting Zone2 speakers
The Zone2 function allows you to playback an input
source in the room where the unit is installed (main
zone) and in another room (Zone2). To connect the
Zone2 speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple
rooms (multi-zone)” (p.75).
• Surround speakers or bi-amplified front speakers cannot be used
while the Zone2 function is enabled.
12
3
9
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
The unit (rear)
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not
making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 18
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
(through output) features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
■ Video jacks
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
(Stereo L/R jacks)
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
(Stereo mini jack)
Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo
mini-plug cable.
Input/output jacks and cables
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI cable
Video pin cable
AV 1
(TV)
OPTICAL
Digital optical cable
AV 2
Digital coaxial cable
AUDIO 2
Stereo pin cable
AUD IO
AUX
Stereo mini-plug cable
En 19
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can
also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.
■ HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.122).
■ Composite video connection
Connect the TV to the unit with a video pin cable and a digital optical cable.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.
3 Connecting a TV
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
2
AV
3
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO 1
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
OPTICAL
OO
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
2
AV
3
AUDIO 1
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
V
V
OPTICAL
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
O
O
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
Video input
(composite video)
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 20
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect a
BLUETOOTH device, an iPod, or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
– Connecting a BLUETOOTH device (p.60)
– Connecting an iPod (p.61)
– Connecting a USB storage device (p.66)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.21).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• If you connect a video device to the unit via HDMI, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of
the unit (p.19).
• For the HDCP 2.2-compatible HDMI device, use the HDMI 6 jack to connect it.
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
optical, digital coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
• If you connect a video device to the unit via composite video connection, you need to connect your TV to
the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.20).
4 Connecting playback devices
AUDI O
2
AUDI O
3
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
2
AV
3
AUDIO 1
HDMI 4 HDMI 5HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDCP2.2
ANTENNA
AMFM
75
(
RADIO
)
HDMI 6
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
HDMI 4 HDMI 5HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDCP2.2
HDMI 6
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI 1–6 jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital optical AV 1 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 3 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV
3
AUDIO 1
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
VIDEO
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV
2
VIDEO
COAXIAL
R
L
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV
2
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
VIDEO
CC
V
V
L
R
L
R
O
O
The unit (rear)
AV 1–3 (VIDEO) jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital optical,
digital coaxial or
analog stereo)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack,
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack,
or AV 3 (AUDIO) jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 21
■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
❑ Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to HDMI 2 and AV 3 (AUDIO) jacks
of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2
Press HDMI 2 to select “HDMI 2” (video input jack to be used) as the
input source.
3
Press OPTION.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (
e
/
r
) to select “AV 3” (audio input jack to be
used).
6
Press OPTION.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “HDMI 2” as the input source by pressing HDMI 2, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–6 AV 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–6
AUDIO 1 (COAXIAL)
AV 2 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–6
AV 3 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 2–3 (AUDIO)
AUDI O
2
AUDI O
3
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
2
AV
3
AUDIO 1
HDMI 3HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
HDMI 2
HDMI 2
HDMI
R
L
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI 2 jack
Video output
(HDMI output)
AV 3 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
The unit (rear)
HDMI
AV
5 6
12 34
123
FM
SLEEP
HDMI
AV
5
6
1
3
4
2
SLEEP
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAY
RETURN
P
U
T
E
S
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUM
E
POP-UP/MEN
U
DISPLAY
RETURN
OPTION
HDMI 2
Cursor keys
ENTER
Cursor keys
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Audio In
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Audio••••••AV3
VOL.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 22
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on
the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following
connections.
Connecting to the jack on the front panel
Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable
audio players to the unit.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit.
If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing AUX, the audio played back on the
device will be output from the unit.
• You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• For details on how to connect an USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.66).
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit
Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial
AV 2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 1 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV 3 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 2–3 (AUDIO)
AUDI O
2
AUDI O
3
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
2
AV
3
AUDIO 1
HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or
analog stereo)
AV 1–3 jacks
AUDIO 1-3 jacks
The unit (rear)
Audio device
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
(CONNECT)
BD/DVD
TV NET RADIO
AUX
SCENE
AUDIO
PROGRA
M
5V
1A
Portable audio player
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 23
■ FM/AM antennas (RX-S601)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
■ DAB/FM antenna (RX-S601D)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
5 Connecting the radio antennas
AUDI O
2
AUDI O
3
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
2
AV
3
AUDIO 1
HDMI 4 HDMI 5HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDCP2.2
ANTENNA
AMFM
75
(
RADIO
)
HDMI 6
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
AUDI O
2
AUDI O
3
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
1
(TV)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
2
AV
3
AUDIO 1
HDMI 4 HDMI 5HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDCP2.2
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
HDMI 6
HDMI OUT
HDCP2.2
ARC
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
75
DAB /F M
DAB/FM antenna
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 24
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Connecting a network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the
unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need
to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the
network parameters manually (p.99).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Preparing a wireless antenna
If you connect the unit wirelessly, erect the wireless antenna.
For information on how to connect the unit to a wireless network, see “Connecting to a
network wirelessly” (p.31).
Erect the wireless antenna.
• Do not apply excessive force on the wireless antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna.
6 Preparing for connecting to a network
FR
O
NETWORK
AUDI O
2
AUDI O
3
HDMI 4 HDMI 5HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
D
VD
)
HDCP2.2
(
NET
)
ANTENNA
AMFM
75
(
RADIO
)
HDMI 6
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Wireless
router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
WIRELESS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 25
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
7 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
110V
120V
220V
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 26
Select the desired on-screen menu language.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. To continue the language setup, press RETURN.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Bluetooth
Language
English
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
Italiano
中文
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Bluetooth
Language
English
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
Italiano
中文
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
z z
Cursor keys
En 27
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children.
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
– Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
• When using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power AMP Assign”
(p.88) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO.
• When using the front 5.1-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
configuration (p.14), set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.89) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” beforehand.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the
front panel.
• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
The following screen appears on the TV.
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
12
3
9
45
Ear height
The unit (front)
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Press SETUP key
to Start
“Power AMP Assign”
setting (p.88)
Power Amp Assign
Basic
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
z z
En 28
5
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Start” and press SETUP.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to
start the measurement immediately.
• To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the
procedure in “Error messages” (p.29).
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
1 The number of speakers (front side/rear
side/subwoofer)
2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest)
3 Adjustment range of speaker output level
4 Warning message (displayed only if a problem occurs)
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.29) or “Warning messages” (p.30).
• A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in
the front display.
• If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use
the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages.
6
Press ENTER after confirming the measurement
result.
7
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and
press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
8
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
1
2
3
4
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
OK:ENTER
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
SAVE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 29
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
TV screen
Front display
■ Procedure to handle errors
1
Check the content of error message and
press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To exit the YPAO measurement:
a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press
ENTER.
c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
To retry the YPAO measurement from
beginning:
Select “RETRY” and press ENTER.
To proceed with the current YPAO
measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only):
Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER.
Error
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
ERROR
E-5:Noisy
PROCEED
5%
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
E-5:NOISY
VOL.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:No Front SP
(E-1:NO FRNT SP)
Front speakers are not detected.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker
connections.
E-2:No Sur. SP
(E-2:NO SUR SP)
One of the surround speakers cannot be
detected.
E-5:Noisy
(E-5:NOISY)
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and
ignores any noise detected.
E-7:No MIC
(E-7:NO MIC)
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO.
E-8:No Signal
(E-8:NO SIGNAL)
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test
tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9:User Cancel
(E-9:CANCEL)
The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary.
E-10:Internal Err.
(E-10:INTERNAL)
An internal error has occurred.
Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs
repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 30
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
TV screen
Front display
■ Procedure to handle warnings
1
Check the content of warning message
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To save the measurement results:
Select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
To discard the measurement result:
Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
3
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the
unit.
Warning
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
W-1:Out of Phase
OK:ENTER
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
W-1:PHASE
VOL.
Problem speaker (blinks)
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
(W-1:PHASE)
A speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this
message may appear even if the speakers are connected
correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2:Over Distance
(W-2:DISTANCE)
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft)
from the listening position.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker
within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position.
W-3:Level Error
(W-3:LEVEL)
There are significant volume differences
between the speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of
each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is
any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect
speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We
recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 31
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
• When you connect the unit to a router with a network cable, you need not do this procedure.
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
You can also use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.7) to
control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on
the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.32).
• You cannot use the wireless LAN connection simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.24) or
Wireless Direct (p.39).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.7) to control
the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.39).
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.24) or the wireless LAN
connection (p.32).
• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the unit cannot connect to the Internet. Therefore, you cannot use any
kind of Internet service such as Internet radio.
• Also the mobile device cannot connect to the Internet, so we recommend you disconnect the mobile device
from the unit.
10 Connecting to a network wirelessly
The unit
Wireless router
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
The unit
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
En 32
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and
press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Share Wi-Fi
Settings(iOS)” and press ENTER.
Yes
Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPod touch)?
Yes
A (p.32)
B (p.34)
Does your wireless router
(access point) has a WPS
button?
C (p.35)
No
No
Network Connection
Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)
OK:ENTER
Back:RETURN
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select a setup method.
WPS Button
Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS)
Access Point Scan
Manual Setting
PIN Code
OK:ENTER
Back:RETURN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
z z
Cursor keys
En 33
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method.
The following connection methods are available.
• When you use wired network connection, Wireless (WAC) is not available.
• A wireless connection cannot be established using Wireless (WAC) if your
wireless router (access point) uses WEP encryption. Try another connection
method.
9
Press ENTER to proceed to the next screen.
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly
If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform
the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The
following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)
1
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay
speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.
iOS (example of English version)
2
Select the network (access point) of which you want
to share the settings with the unit.
iOS (example of English version)
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically
connected to the selected network (access point).
Wireless (WAC)
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS
device to the unit using a wireless connection. For
details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting
wirelessly”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)
USB Cable
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS
device to the unit using a USB cable. For details,
see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB
cable”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)
Share Wi-Fi Set-
Select method for
sharing setting with
iOS device.
Wireless (WAC)
USB Cable
OK:ENTER
Back:RETURN
The name of the unit
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cursor keys
En 34
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable
If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the
procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.
1
Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
2
Press ENTER on the remote control.
3
Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ B: Using the WPS button configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3
seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try
another connection method.
• Depending on the model of the wireless router (access point), the unit may not
connect to it. In this case, try connection with “Access Point Scan” or “Manual
Setting” (p.35).
• You can use “WPS Button” (p.35) in the “Setup” menu to set up a wireless
connection with the WPS button.
AUX
AUDI O
5V
1A
The unit (front)
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the
Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless
home network.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
ENTER
z z
En 35
■ C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS button
configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the
wireless network settings.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and
press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
connection method and press ENTER.
The following connection methods are available.
Network Connection
Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)
OK:ENTER
Back:RETURN
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the
WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow
the instructions displayed on the TV screen.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings(iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.32).
Access Point
Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by
searching for an access point. For details on
settings, see “Searching for an access point”
(p.36).
Manual Setting
You can setup a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.37).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point). The method is available if the
wireless router (access point) supports the WPS
PIN code method. For details on settings, see
“Using the WPS PIN code” (p.38).
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select a setup method.
WPS Button
Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS)
Access Point Scan
Manual Setting
PIN Code
OK:ENTER
Back:RETURN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
z z
Cursor keys
En 36
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
❑ Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
access point and press ENTER.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
2
Press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key.
Button functions
[←]/[→]: Moves the cursor left and right.
[Aa]: Switches the letter cases (upper/lower).
[BKSP]: Deletes the character to the left of the selected one.
[Space]: Enters a space.
[DEL]: Deletes the selected character.
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the
previous screen.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try
another connection method.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Access Point Scan
Access Point X
WPA-PSK (AES)
SSID:
Security:
Security Key:
Connect
RETURN
ENTEREdit:
CANCEL:
***_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Network Connection
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cursor keys
En 37
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “SSID” and
press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point.
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the
previous screen.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and
the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption
method.
Choices
None, WEP, WPA-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key”
and press ENTER.
• If you select “None” in step 3, this item is not available.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key.
If you select “WEP” in step 3, enter either 5 or 13 character
string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
If you select the method other than “WEP” in step 3, enter
either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the
previous screen.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from step 1.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Manual Setting
Access Point X
None
SSID:
Security:
Security Key:
Connect
RETURN
ENTEREdit:
CANCEL:
1a2b
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Network Connection
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
****
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Network Connection
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cursor keys
En 38
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
❑ Using the WPS PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
access point and press ENTER.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
2
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
3
Press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
: 00000000
OK:ENTER
Back:RETURN
PIN Code
PIN Code
Enter the PIN code
into the access point.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cursor keys
En 39
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and
press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless
Direct” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and
the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption
method.
Choices
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key”
and press ENTER.
• If you select “None” in step 7, this item is not available.
9
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key.
Enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal
digits.
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the
previous screen.
• Before proceeding to the next step, record the following information. These
information will be needed to configure the Wi-Fi setting of a mobile device.
– SSID displayed on the TV screen
– Security key you have just entered
Network Connection
Connection Wireless Direct
OK:ENTER
Back:RETURN
abc_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Network Connection
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
z z
Cursor keys
En 40
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
10
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Save” and
press ENTER to save the setting.
This completes the settings and “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
Next, configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
11
Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in step 9 from the list of available
access points.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in step 9.
12
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cursor keys
En 41
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RA
M
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZONE
2
Input selection
keys
VOLUME
MUTE
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S601) (p.48)
• Listening to DAB radio (RX-S601D) (p.52)
• Listening to FM radio (RX-S601D) (p.56)
• Playing back iPod music (p.61)
• Playing back music via BLUETOOTH (p.60)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.66)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.69)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.72)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.64)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu (p.81).
Basic playback procedure
Input selection
keys
En 42
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SCENE
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off with just
one touch.
Selecting a registered scene
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or
start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction
with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.92) in the
“Setup” menu to “On”.
Configuring scene assignments
1
Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
• Select an input source (p.41)
• Select a sound program (p.43)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.47)
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE
Input HDMI 1 AV 1 NET RADIO TUNER
Sound program Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 5ch Stereo 5ch Stereo
Compressed
Music Enhancer
OffOnOnOn
SCENE link
playback
On On Off Off
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
SET Complete
VOL.
En 43
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTER
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
OPTION
STRAIGHT
DIRECT
ENHANCER
BASS
PROGRAM
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ I want to enjoy viewing video sources such as
movies, TV programs, or games.
• Select a sound program suitable for each video source by
pressing PROGRAM repeatedly (p.44).
❑ I want to enjoy listening to music sources or stereo
playback.
• Select a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback by
pressing PROGRAM repeatedly (p.45).
❑ I want to enjoy multichannel playback from
2-channel sources.
• Select a surround decoder in the “Option” menu (p.80).
❑ I want to enjoy unprocessed sounds in original
channels.
• Switch to the straight decode mode by pressing STRAIGHT
(p.46).
❑ I want to enjoy pure high fidelity sounds.
• Enable the direct playback mode by pressing DIRECT (p.47).
This mode reduces the electrical noise from other circuitry to allow
you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
❑ I want to enjoy enhanced bass sounds.
• Enable Extra Bass by pressing BASS (p.47).
❑ I want to enjoy listening to compressed music.
• Enable Compressed Music Enhancer by pressing ENHANCER
(p.47).
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music stored on a
BLUETOOTH device or USB storage device with additional depth
and breadth (p.47).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the
straight decode mode (p.46) is automatically selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.9).
Selecting the sound mode
En 44
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
• You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.81) in the “Option” menu.
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Sci-Fi
VOL.
Sound program category
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
En 45
■ Sound programs suitable for music (MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
■ Sound programs suitable for stereo playback (STEREO)
You can select stereo playback.
• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.44) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.45) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “5ch Stereo” is
selected.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound
field using the front-side speakers.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in
front.
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
5ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
En 46
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
D
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.118).
1
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select a surround
decoder.
The previously selected surround decoder is selected. You
can change the surround decoder in “Sur.Decode” (p.80) in
the “Option” menu.
• You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.93)
in the “Setup” menu.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
STRAIGHT
VOL.
bPro Logic
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPLII Movie
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for
movies.
bPLII Music
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for
music.
bPLII Game
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for
games.
Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
†‡Pro Logic
VOL.
“SUR. DECODE” appears
En 47
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENHANCER
DIRECT
BASS
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(direct playback)
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not
available.
– Selecting sound programs
– Adjusting the tone control
– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)
Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless
of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.
1
Press BASS.
Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or
disabled.
• You can also use “Extra Bass” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu to enable/disable
Extra Bass.
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz
– High-definition streaming audio
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.81) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
DIRECT
VOL.
MUTE
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Enhancer On
VOL.
ENHANCER
“ENHANCER” lights up
En 48
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press z (power).
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode
and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press FM or AM to select a band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the
frequency currently selected is displayed.
2
Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
automatically.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception from “FM Mode” (p.80) in the “Option” menu. When the
signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural
may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.83) in the “Option” menu.
Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S601)
z (power)
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TU••••FM50/AM9
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
3
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
OPTION
TUNING
FM
AM
En 49
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to
40 stations).
• To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the
Auto Preset function.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”.
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again
to start the registration immediately.
• To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press
PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds
after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just
wait for 5 seconds).
• To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
■ Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.48)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Auto Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
Preset number from which to start the registration
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Auto Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset number
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
02:Empty
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
3
TU
NIN
G
HOM
E
DI
S
PL
A
Y
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
PRESET
FM
AM
MEMORY
Cursor keys
En 50
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
■ Clearing preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Clear Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset station to be cleared
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
STEREO
TUNED
01:Cleared
VOL.
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
3
TU
NIN
G
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
PRESET
FM
AM
Cursor keys
En 51
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.49).
2
Press INFO (WPS) on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Item name
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
CLASSICS
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Information
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TP FM101.30MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
Traffic information station (frequency)
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
Cursor keys
En 52
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer
sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The
unit can also receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that
allows for more stations using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which
has a more efficient transmission method.
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently
being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB
frequencies, check WorldDMB online at
http://www.worlddab.org/.
• For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas”
(p.23).
Preparing the DAB tuning
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below
to perform an initial scan.
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you
have not performed an initial scan yet.
2
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes
into the first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.55).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.81) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the
initial scan.
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
2
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio
station.
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.83) in the “Option” menu.
Listening to DAB radio (RX-S601D)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Press [ENTER]
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
>>>------- 30%
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Daily Service
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
BBC National
VOL.
Secondary station
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
DAB
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
NE
T
AUX
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
TUNING
DAB
(RX-S601D)
En 53
Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you
have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting
their preset numbers.
• You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
(p.52) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset
number, and then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset
number.
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB
radio station.
• “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:BBC Radio 4
VOL.
Preset number
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
02:Empty
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
PRESET:01
VOL.
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
DAB
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
NE
T
AUX
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
TU
NIN
G
HOM
E
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
PRESET
MEMORY
DAB
(RX-S601D)
En 54
■ Clearing preset DAB radio stations
Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Displaying the DAB information
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is
tuned into a DAB radio station.
1
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Press INFO (WPS) on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB
radio station.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Clear Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:Clear?
VOL.
Preset station to be cleared
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:Cleared
VOL.
Service Label Station name
DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label Ensemble name
Program Type Station genre
Date And Time Current date and time
Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
VOL.
Item name
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Classic Music
VOL.
Information
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
DAB
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
NE
T
AUX
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
DAB
Cursor keys
(RX-S601D)
En 55
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label
(0 [none] to 100 [best]).
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune Aid” and press
ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB
channel label.
5
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
5A Level: 80
VOL.
DAB channel label Reception strength
Frequency
Channel
label
Frequency
Channel
label
174.928 MHz 5A 208.064 MHz 9D
176.640 MHz 5B 209.936 MHz 10A
178.352 MHz 5C 211.648 MHz 10B
180.064 MHz 5D 213.360 MHz 10C
181.936 MHz 6A 215.072 MHz 10D
183.648 MHz 6B 216.928 MHz 11A
185.360 MHz 6C 218.640 MHz 11B
187.072 MHz 6D 220.352 MHz 11C
188.928 MHz 7A 222.064 MHz 11D
190.640 MHz 7B 223.936 MHz 12A
192.352 MHz 7C 225.648 MHz 12B
194.064 MHz 7D 227.360 MHz 12C
195.936 MHz 8A 229.072 MHz 12D
197.648 MHz 8B 230.784 MHz 13A
199.360 MHz 8C 232.496 MHz 13B
201.072 MHz 8D 234.208 MHz 13C
202.928 MHz 9A 235.776 MHz 13D
204.640 MHz 9B 237.488 MHz 13E
206.352 MHz 9C 239.200 MHz 13F
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
DAB
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
NE
T
AUX
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
DAB
Cursor keys
(RX-S601D)
En 56
You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press FM to select the FM band.
2
Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from an FM
radio station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception from “FM Mode” (p.80) in the “Option” menu. When the
signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural
may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.83) in the “Option” menu.
Listening to FM radio (RX-S601D)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
(RX-S601D)
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
DAB
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
NE
T
AUX
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
3
DA
B
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
TUNING
FM
En 57
Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you
have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting
their preset numbers.
• You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
■ Registering FM radio stations
automatically (Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to
40 stations).
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the
Auto Preset function.
1
Press FM to select the FM band.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”.
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again
to start the registration immediately.
• To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press
PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds
after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just
wait for 5 seconds).
• To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
■ Registering an FM radio station manually
Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset
number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.48)
to tune into the desired FM radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the
selected radio station will be registered to the preset
number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will
be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number
after the most recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Auto Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
Preset number from which to start the registration
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Auto Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset number
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
02:Empty
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
(RX-S601D)
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
DAB
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
NE
T
AUX
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
3
DA
B
TU
NIN
G
HOM
E
DI
S
PL
A
Y
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
PRESET
FM
MEMORY
Cursor keys
En 58
■ Selecting a preset FM radio station
Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset
number.
1
Press FM to select the FM band.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired FM
radio station.
• “No Presets” appears when no FM radio stations are registered.
■ Clearing preset FM radio stations
Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press FM to select the FM band.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Clear Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset station to be cleared
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:Cleared
VOL.
(RX-S601D)
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
DAB
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
NE
T
AUX
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
3
DA
B
TU
NIN
G
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
PRESET
FM
Cursor keys
En 59
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many
countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as
“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned
into a Radio Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.57).
2
Press INFO (WPS) on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item
appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio
station does not provide the Radio Data System service.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Item name
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
CLASSICS
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Information
En 60
You can play back music files stored on a BLUETOOTH device
(such as smartphones) on the unit.
• To use the BLUETOOTH function, set “Bluetooth” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu to
“On”.
• For details on supported BLUETOOTH devices, see “Supported devices and file
formats” (p.120).
Playback BLUETOOTH device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a BLUETOOTH connection
between a BLUETOOTH device (such as smartphones) and the unit,
and play back music stored the BLUETOOTH device on the unit.
• The unit does not support video playback via BLUETOOTH.
1
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the
input source.
2
On the BLUETOOTH device, select the unit from the
available device list.
A connection between the BLUETOOTH device and the
unit will be made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
3
On the BLUETOOTH device, select a song and start
playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song
title) is displayed on the TV.
• If the unit detects the BLUETOOTH device previously connected, the unit
automatically connects to the BLUETOOTH device after Step 1. To establish
another BLUETOOTH connection, first terminate the current BLUETOOTH
connection.
• To terminate the BLUETOOTH connection, perform one of the following
operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the BLUETOOTH device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.87) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
Playing back music via BLUETOOTH
BLUETOOTH device
(such as smartphones)
The unit
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
PRESET
HOM
E
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
BLUETOOTH
External device
operation keys
En 61
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
You can also play back iPod music in other methods. For details,
see the following pages.
• Playing back music with AirPlay (P.64)
• Playing back music stored on a BLUETOOTH device (P.60)
• AV CONTROLLER (P.7)
• You cannot play back iPod video on the unit.
• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.120).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours.
If “Network Standby” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly
operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.63).
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen (p.62) is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen (p.62) is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to
the simple play mode (p.63).
Playing back iPod music
AUX
AUDIO
5V
1A
The unit (front)
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Connected
VOL.
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
DISPLAY
USB
Cursor keys
En 62
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.63) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• A content selected by the cursor is displayed on the front display.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.63) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
• A content name of a current playback is displayed on the front display. To switch
the displayed item, press INFO (p.79).
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
1
4
5
2
3
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
iPod
Music
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/6
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding down).
j
1
2
iPod
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
5:10
[DISPLAY] : Screen Off
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING
PRESET
HOM
E
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 63
■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)
1
Press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “iPod Mode” and
press ENTER.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, select “iPod Mode” and
press ENTER again.
3
Operate your iPod itself to start playback.
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or
“Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
Cursor keys
En 64
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on
the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.24). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu.
• If the iPod does not recognize the unit, check your network environment (p.24).
• This section describes “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod touch”,
“iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.120).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
Playing back music with AirPlay
PC
iTunes
Router
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
The unit
(Wired network or wireless network)
iTunes (example) iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example) iPod iOS6 (example)
En 65
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock (Interlock)” (p.83) in the
“Option” menu to “Off”.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
2
1
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
AirPlay
Now Playing
5:30
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
PRESET
HOM
E
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
External device
operation keys
En 66
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.
• For details on playable USB devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.120).
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen (p.67) is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen (p.67) is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
AUX
AUDIO
5V
1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
DISPLAY
USB
Cursor keys
En 67
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.68) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• A content selected by the cursor is displayed on the front display.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.68) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
• A content name of a current playback is displayed on the front display. To switch
the displayed item, press INFO (p.79).
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/12
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
USB
Top
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
1
2
USB
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
[DISPLAY] : Screen Off
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
PRESET
HOM
E
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 68
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or
“Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
Cursor keys
En 69
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.24). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information”
(p.99) in the “Setup” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.120).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
❑ For Windows Media Player 12
1
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
❑ For Windows Media Player 11
1
Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
2
Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
3
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.
4
Click “OK” to exit.
• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 70
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen (p.70) is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen (p.71) is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/14
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
SERVER
NAS A
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
DISPLAY
NET
Cursor keys
En 71
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.100).
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or
“Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
1
2
SERVER
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
[DISPLAY] : Screen Off
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
PRESET
HOM
E
DI
S
PL
A
Y
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 72
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.24). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
Playback of Internet radio
Follow the procedure below to select an Internet radio station and
start playback.
You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen (p.72) is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen (p.73) is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Playback indicator
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Listening to Internet radio
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/7
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
NET RADIO
Top
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
Cursor keys
ENTER
DISPLAY
NET
Cursor keys
En 73
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
• Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
1
2
Station Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
NET RADIO
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] : Screen Off
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
External device
operation keys
En 74
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the
“Bookmarks” folder.
■ Registering the station with the Option
menu
Follow the procedure below to register your favorite station to the
“Bookmarks” folder.
1
While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Bookmark On” and
press ENTER.
• On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. On
the browse screen, the station selected in the list is added to the “Bookmarks”
folder.
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the folder
and then “Bookmark Off”.
■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website
You can also register your favorite Internet radio stations on the
vTuner website.
1
Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.
2
Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID in “Information” (p.99) in the
“Setup” menu.
3
Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.
4
Register your favorite radio stations.
Click the “Add” icon (
❤
+) next to the station name.
• To remove the station from the “My_Favorites” folder, select “My_Favorites”
in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (
❤
–) next to the
station name.
You can switch the language.
Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
OPTION
Cursor keys
En 75
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person
can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM or DAB/FM radio), Bluetooth, USB and network sources can be
output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to
the AUDIO jacks (AV 3 or AUDIO 2–3 jacks) of the unit.
• The party mode (p.77) allows you to play back the same audio output in main zone as Zone2, whatever the
input audio signal type.
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.88) in
the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
Living room (main zone)
Study room (Zone2)
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
12
39
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
En 76
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RA
M
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
PART
Y
Input selection
keys
VOLUME
SLEEP
MAIN/
ZONE 2
z
MUTE
DIRECT
Controlling Zone2
1
Set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”.
2
Press z (receiver power).
Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or
disabled.
When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE 2” lights up in the
front display.
• You can enable/disable Zone2 output using the ZONE key on the front panel
(p.8).
3
Use the following keys to select an input source.
AV 3: AV 3 (audio) jacks
AUDIO 2–3: AUDIO 2–3 jacks
AUX: AUX jack
FM: FM radio
AM: AM radio (RX-S601)
DAB: DAB radio (RX-S601D)
BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection (the unit as a
Bluetooth receiver)
USB: USB jack
NET: Network sources (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is
selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches
to “SERVER”.
• An input source for Zone2 can only be selected using the input selection
keys on the remote control.
• It is useful to assign the frequently-used input to the SCENE key (p.77).
4
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S601) (p.48)
• Listening to DAB/FM radio (RX-S601D) (p.52)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.60)
• Playing back iPod music (p.61)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.66)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.69)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.72)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.64)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
to control Zone2.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
• Zone2 output is disabled when DIRECT is pressed to enable direct playback
mode. Press DIRECT to disable direct playback mode, and follow the
procedure from step 2 to enable Zone2 output.
• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP
repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of
time.
• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE.
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2, enable the party mode (p.77).
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
Input selection
keys
En 77
■ Selecting the input source with the SCENE
function
You can use the SCENE function to select the input source for
Zone2 playback.
• To use the SCENE function in Zone2, you must configure scene assignments
separately from the main zone settings.
• You can register only the input source to the SCENE key. By default, the following
settings are registered for each scene.
–BD/DVD: AV 3
– TV: AUDIO 2
– NET: NET RADIO
– RADIO: TUNER
1
Set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”.
2
Press SCENE.
The input source registered to the corresponding scene is
selected and Zone2 output is enabled.
❑ Configuring scene assignments
1
Set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”.
2
Select a Zone2 input source.
3
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
1
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
• The party mode is not available when the unit is in direct playback mode.
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
Input selection
keys
PARTY
MAIN/
ZONE 2
SCENE
Input selection
keys
En 78
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
ENTER
N
O
I
T
P
O
P
U
T
E
S
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
A
U
X
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
HOM
E
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZONE
2
PRESET
MEMORY
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut
numbers.
• You can also use the “Bookmark” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.74).
• BLUETOOTH and AirPlay are applied to the input source. You cannot register
particular songs in the device individually.
■ Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
1
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
2
Hold down MEMORY for 3 seconds.
• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use
PRESET to select the shortcut number after step 2.
3
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
■ Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
1
Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired item.
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected
to this unit.
– A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to
the network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A BLUETOOTH connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this
unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you
have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not
recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
Useful functions
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:Empty
VOL.
Shortcut number (flashes)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
02:Empty
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:USB
VOL.
En 79
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO (WPS) on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item
appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied
separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder
Off” appears.
Input source group Item
HDMI
AV
AUX
AUDIO
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
BLUETOOTH
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program
(sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP
Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
TUNER (FM/AM)
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station (p.51, 59).
TUNER (DAB) See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.54) for details.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Audio Decoder
VOL.
Item name
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
†‡Pro Logic
VOL.
Information
En 80
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.
• Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available.
For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
VOL.
Input Select
Input Select
Tone Control
DSP/Surround
Volume Trim
Lipsync
Signal Info
Audio In
Option
Item Function Page
Input Select (Input) Switches the input source. 81
Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and
low-frequency range of sounds.
81
DSP/Surround
(DSP/Surround)
Program (PRG) Select the sound programs and stereo playback. 44
Sur.Decode
(SrDec)
Select which surround decoder is used when
Sur.Decode is selected as the program.
46
DSP Level
(DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level. 81
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the
volume is adjusted.
81
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 81
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input
sources.
82
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 82
Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the
“Setup” menu.
82
Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 82
Audio In (Audio)
Combines the video jack of the selected input
source with an audio jack of others.
82
Video Out (Video) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 83
FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM
radio reception.
48, 56
Auto Preset (Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with
strong signals as presets.
49, 57
Clear Preset (Clear Preset) Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. 50, 58
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
51
iPod Mode (iPod Mode) Switches the iPod operation mode. 63
En 81
■ Input Select (Input)
Switches the input source. Press ENTER to switch to the selected input source.
Choices
HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3, TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, Airplay, (network
sources), Bluetooth, AUX
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass
(Bypass) to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround)
Configures the sound field program and surround settings.
❑ DSP Level (DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Setting range
-6 dB to 0 dB
to +3 dB
❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.47).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.47).
Settings
Default
TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay, (network sources), Bluetooth: On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
Repeat (Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.63),
USB storage device (p.68), or media server (p.71).
—
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.63),
USB storage device (p.68), or media server (p.71).
—
Volume Interlock (Interlock)
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod
via AirPlay.
83
Bookmark On (Bookmark On)
Bookmark Off (Bookmark Off)
Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the
“Bookmarks” folder, or removes it from the
“Bookmarks” folder.
74
Init Scan (Init Scan)
(RX-S601D only)
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
52
Tune Aid (Tune Aid)
(RX-S601D only)
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel.
55
Item Function Page
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off
(Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
En 82
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■ Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
Default
AirPlay: Off (Off)
Others: On (On)
■ Signal Info (Signal Info)
Displays information about the video/audio signal.
Choices
• To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly.
■ Audio In (Audio)
Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–6 or AV 1–3) with an
audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3
■ Setup procedure
See “Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks” (p.21).
Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal
Channel (CHANNEL)
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels,
and LFE.
Sampling
(SAMPLING)
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate (BITRATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Video In (VIDEO IN) Type and resolution of the input digital signal
Video Out
(VIDEO OUT)
Type and resolution of the output digital signal
En 83
■ Video Out (Video)
Selects a video to be output with the selected audio source. For example, you can
watching the video while listening to the radio.
Input sources
TUNER, USB, Bluetooth, AUX
Settings
■ Volume Interlock (Interlock)
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Settings
Off
(Off) Does not output video.
HDMI 1–6, AV 1–3 Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited
(Ltd)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Full (Full)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
En 84
CONFIGURATIONS
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry
out operations while viewing the front display.
• If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen.
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Bluetooth
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Bluetooth
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
En 85
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Configuration
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 88
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 88
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 88
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 88
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 89
Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 89
Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 89
Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. 89
Virtual CINEMA FRONT Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. 89
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 89
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 90
Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 90
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 90
HDMI Configuration
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 91
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 91
Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 91
TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 91
Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 92
ARC Enables/disables ARC. 92
SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 92
En 86
Sound
DSP Parameter
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 93
Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 93
Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 93
Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 93
Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 93
Lipsync
Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 94
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 94
Volum e
Scale Switches the scale of the volume display. 94
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 94
Main Zone Max Volume Sets the main zone maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 94
Main Zone Initial Volume Sets the main zone initial volume when the unit is turned on. 94
Zone2 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 95
Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume when the Zone2 output is enabled. 95
ECO
Auto Power Standby Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 96
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 96
Function
Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 97
Input Skip Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT knob on the front panel. 97
Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 97
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 97
Remote Color Key Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. 98
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 98
Network
Information Displays the network information on the unit. 99
Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 99
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 99
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 100
DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 100
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 100
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 100
Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. 101
Menu Item Function Page
En 87
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Enables/disables the BLUETOOTH functions. 101
Audio Receive Disconnect Terminates the BLUETOOTH connection between the BLUETOOTH device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 60
Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from BLUETOOTH devices (BLUETOOTH standby). 101
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 102
Menu Item Function Page
En 88
Speaker
Configures the speaker settings manually.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are
possible using the Zone2 speakers or bi-amp connection.
Settings
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
Settings
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Power Amp Assign
Basic
Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).
BI-AMP
Select this option when you connect front speakers that support
bi-amp connections (p.17).
Zone2
Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.75) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone.
Subwoofer
Use
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.
The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Front
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Center
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
En 89
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a
speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified
value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz
, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear,
switch the subwoofer phase.
Settings
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.
Settings
• You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass (p.47).
Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
configuration.
Settings
• Select “On” only when utilizing the Virtual CINEMA FRONT configuration (p.14).
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft)
Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
Surround
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Crossover
Subwoofer Phase
Normal Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.
Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Extra Bass
Off Disables Extra Bass.
On Enables Extra Bass.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Off Disables the front 5-channel speaker configuration.
On Enables the front 5-channel speaker configuration.
En 90
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB
Others: -1.0 dB
■ Equalizer
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Selects the type of equalizer to be used.
Settings
• “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.27).
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select the desired speaker channel.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the
cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
EQ Select
PEQ
Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO
measurement (p.27).
GEQ
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Off Does not use the equalizer.
Off Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Equalizer
EQ Select
GEQ Edit
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
2.5kHz
6.3kHz
16kHz
GEQ
Front L
Back:RETURN
En 91
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Configuration
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.122).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.122) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
HDMI OUT (TV)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when
the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the
input selection keys (HDMI 1–6) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in
standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3
Default
AV1
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
HDMI Control
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”,
and “SCENE”.
Audio Output
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On
Enables the audio output from the speakers.
Off
Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Standby Through
Off
(When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
Auto
Automatically selects whether to output videos/audio depending on
the status of the connected device.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
TV Audio Input
En 92
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Enables/disables ARC (p.19) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices
connected to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene
selection.
• TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device
• Playback device: starting playback
Choices (SCENE keys)
BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO
Settings
Default
BD/DVD, TV: On
NET, RADIO: Off
• SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We
recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
Standby Sync
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
ARC
Off Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
SCENE
Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
En 93
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ DSP Parameter
Configures the surround decoder settings.
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.44). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA
DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch
Stereo).
Settings
Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function
is enabled, you can wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and
generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This
setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Settings
Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective
when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Setting range
0 to 3
to 7
Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher
to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound
field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Setting range
-3 to 0
to +3
Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field.
Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower
to weaken (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is
selected.
Setting range
0.0 to 0.3
to 1.0
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Panorama
Off Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
Center Width
Dimension
Center Image
En 94
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
• You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.82) in the “Option” menu.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to
“Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to
“Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms
to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
■ Volume
Configures the volume settings.
Switches the scale of the volume display.
Settings
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital
and DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Sets the main zone maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Sets the main zone initial volume when the unit is turned on.
Settings
Select
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Adjustment
Scale
dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.
0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0.5 to 97.0).
Dynamic Range
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Min/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Main Zone Max Volume
Main Zone Initial Volume
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
(0.5 dB increments)
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
En 95
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.88) is set to “Zone2”.
Sets the Zone2 initial volume when the Zone2 output is enabled.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.88) is set to “Zone2”.
Zone2 Max Volume
Zone2 Initial Volume
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
(0.5 dB increments)
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
En 96
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Auto Power Standby
Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
Settings
Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 minutes
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in
the front display.
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
• Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the
unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit
and the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time.
Off
Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
En 97
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. You can also select a
name from the presets or a name created by the Auto Rename function.
Input sources
HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3, USB, Bluetooth, AUX
Default
HDMI 1–6: Auto
Others: Manual (For USB, Bluetooth, AUX only “Manual” can be selected.)
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Manual” and press ENTER.
• To select a name from the presets, after selecting “Manual”, use the cursor keys (
e
/
r
) to select a preset name.
• When selecting “Auto”, the unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device.
You can check a created name by pressing ENTER.
• During selecting “Auto”, the created name is saved even after the device connection is terminated. To
reset to the default setting, switch the setting to “
Manual
” at once and then set it again to “Auto”.
3
Press ENTER.
The edit screen is displayed.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “OK” to
confirm the new name.
5
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 4.
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Input Skip
Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT knob on the front panel.
You can select the desired input source quickly by skipping unnecessary input sources.
Input sources
HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3, TUNER, USB, NET, Bluetooth, AUX
Settings
■ Dimmer
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0
(higher to brighten)
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.96) is set to “On”.
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
HDMI
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Input Rename
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
Off Does not skip the selected input source.
On Skips the selected input source.
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
o
Memory Guard
Memory Guard On
Back:RETURN
Icon
En 98
■ Remote Color Key
Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control.
Settings
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.77).
Settings
Default
Assigns the functions of playback devices connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
Input
Assigns the unit's input sources to each key. The assigned input
sources can be set separately.
Input sources
HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3, TUNER, USB, NET, Bluetooth, AUX
Default
RED: HDMI 2, GREEN: HDMI 6, YELLOW: AV 2, BLUE: AUX
Program
Sound modes are assigned to keys as follows.
RED: MOVIE
GREEN: MUSIC
YELLOW: STEREO
BLUE: SUR.DECODE
For example, if you press the RED key repeatedly, you can select your
favorite sound program from the sound programs (MOVIE) (p.44)
suitable for the video source.
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
En 99
Network
Configures the network settings.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Information
Displays the network information on the unit.
■ Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Choices
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack
Connection Connection method
SSID The access point to which the unit is connected
Security The encryption method for your network
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner)
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network
with a commercially-available network cable.
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network
via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.32).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to
the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile
device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.39).
DHCP
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
En 100
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
• Operation of the AirPlay function (p.64) or the DMC is not limited by this setting.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10).
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “OK” to
confirm the new name.
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Filter
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
MAC Address 1–10
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Off Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
Y a m a h a x x x x x x _
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Network Name
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
En 101
■ Network Update
Updates the firmware via the network.
Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the
unit’s firmware via the network” (p.106).
Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.
Displays the system ID number.
Bluetooth
Configures the BLUETOOTH settings.
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the BLUETOOTH function (p.60).
Settings
■ Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from BLUETOOTH
devices (BLUETOOTH standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically
turns on when a connect operation is performed on the BLUETOOTH device.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.100) is set to “Off”.
Perform Update
Firmware Version
System ID
Off Disables the BLUETOOTH function.
On
Enables the BLUETOOTH function.
Off Disables the BLUETOOTH standby function.
On
Enables the BLUETOOTH standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
En 102
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
• Default settings are underlined.
Settings
• Japanese and Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
English English
日本語
Japanese
Français French
Deutsch German
Español Spanish
Русский Russian
Italiano Italian
中文
Chinese
En 103
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
z (power).
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
• Default settings are underlined.
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
z (power)
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
Item Function Page
SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 103
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 104
TU
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
104
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 104
INIT Restores the default settings. 104
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 105
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 105
6
Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit.
8 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
SP IMP.••6¬MIN
En 104
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1
, ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (BD/DVD)
for more than 3 seconds.
To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (TV) for
more than 3 seconds.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it
is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images
on the TV screen do not appear correctly.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
REMOTE ID••ID1
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TU••••FM50/AM9
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL
Does not perform an initialization.
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TV FORMAT•NTSC
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
INIT••••CANCEL
En 105
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO
(WPS) to start firmware update.
Choices
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
UPDATE•••••USB
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
VERSION••xx.xx
En 106
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.105).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after SETUP is pressed.
1
Read the on-screen description and press ENTER.
2
To start the firmware update, press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press z (power) on the
front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the
wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the
condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using
the USB memory device (p.105).
• To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via
HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
(p.105).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
Network Update
New firmware available.
You can switch the language.
(You can also start the update
from the “Setup-Network”
screen.)
CANCEL : RETURN
Press ENTER to update now.
Language English
STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
AUXUSB
BLUETOOTH
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5 6
12 34
12
12
3
FM
3
AM
TUNING PRESET
HOME
MEMORY
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
S
TRAI
G
H
TD
I
RE
C
T ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
N
O
I
T
P
O
TO
P MEN
U
MUT
E
PR
OG
RA
M
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
N
ET
A
U
X
U
SB
BL
U
ET
OO
TH
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
FM
3
AM
TU
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
HOM
E
M
EM
O
RY
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
G
RE
E
N
RE
D
S
LEE
P
PART
Y
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 107
APPENDIX
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize
the speaker settings again (p.27). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually,
use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.88).
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Main Zone Max Volume” and “Zone2 Max Volume”in
the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.94).
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Main Zone Initial Volume” and “Zone2 Initial
Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is
turned on (p.94, 95).
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.82).
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.122). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
Input names displayed on the front panel can be changed using “Input Rename” in the
setup menu. Change input names by entering names manually, or by selecting preset
names (such as “Blu-ray” or “DVD”) (p.97).
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.97).
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.104).
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
We want to set limitations on the volume control...
I want to fix the volume when turning on the unit...
The volume varies depending on the input sources...
HDMI Control does not work at all...
I want to change the input source name...
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling
another Yamaha product as well as the unit...
En 108
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu
to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the
unit when this function is enabled.
Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input
jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.21).
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output
(p.94).
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input
into the unit (p.91). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination.
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese,
French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.26).
Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.105).
Various functions to customize the unit are available.
• SCENE settings (p.42)
• Sound/video settings and signal information for each source (p.80)
• Various function settings (p.85)
• System settings (p.103)
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode…
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match
an external device...
Video and audio are not synchronized...
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
I want to update the firmware...
I want to customize the unit...
En 109
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator
on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the
AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.16).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.96).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.103).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.16).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the
AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
En 110
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.104).
The remote control is set to the Zone2 operation mode. Set the remote control to the Main zone operation mode (p.75).
An input source cannot be selected using the
INPUT knob on the front panel.
The “Input Skip” function has been applied to that input source.
Set the “Input Skip” function in the setup menu (p.97) to “Off” for that input
source, or select the input source using the input selection key on the remote
control.
The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the
remote control do not function.
The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not
support the function of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
Use a device which supports the function of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE
keys.
The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's
remote control have been changed.
Set the “Remote Color Key” settings in the “Setup” menu to “Default” (p.98).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 111
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.82).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set.
Use “Main Zone Max Volume” or “Zone2 Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to
adjust the maximum volume (p.94).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
(This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.82).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.90).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform YPAO (p.27) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.88).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform YPAO (p.27) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.90).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain Low Frequency Effect (LFE)
or low-frequency signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.89).
Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.27) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.88).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.91).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
En 112
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.19).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.91).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.92). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.82). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
DSD audio cannot be heard. DSD audio is selected as the input source for Zone2. Enable party mode to play DSD audio in Zone2 (p.77).
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.96).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 113
Video
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about
video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal
Info” in the “Option” menu (p.82). For information about video signals supported
by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.124).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No image (contents required the HDCP 2.2
-compatible HDMI device) from the playback
device connected to the unit with HDMI.
The TV (HDMI input jack) does not support HDCP 2.2, or the
playback device is connected to other than the HDMI 6 jack. (The
Warning message can be displayed on the TV screen.)
Connect the unit to the TV (HDMI input jack) that supports HDCP 2.2. Use the
HDMI 6 jack to connect the playback device.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.19 to 20).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
En 114
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-S601.)
DAB radio (RX-S601D)
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.48).
Use an outdoor FM antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.48).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.48).
Use an outdoor AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.49).
Problem Cause Remedy
No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.52).
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.55), and adjust
the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a
listing of the DAB coverage in your area.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.55), and adjust
the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service
or may not provide information.
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station.
En 115
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.99). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.99).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.69).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.100).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.69).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.100).
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.105).
The mobile device does not recognize the unit
when using AirPlay or AV CONTROLLER.
The unit and the mobile device are connected to different SSID
when using a multiple SSID router.
Connect them to the Primary SSID (at the top of the list).
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
En 116
Bluetooth
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
Problem Cause Remedy
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.101).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection
(p.60).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is
not working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.60).
No sound is produced, or the sound is
interrupted during playback.
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.60).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 117
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.69).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.61).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.24).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Not connected
The network cable is not connected. Connect the network cable properly.
The wireless router (access point) is not found. Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.104).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.69). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
En 118
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD disc.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray Disc).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).
DTS Neo: 6
DTS Neo: 6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray Disc).
Glossary
En 119
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
En 120
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures
the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings,
such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room.
■ Supported devices
❑ BLUETOOTH devices
• BLUETOOTH devices that support A2DP can be used.
• Yamaha does not assure the connections of all BLUETOOTH devices.
❑ USB devices
• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.
❑ iPod
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion or later and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of July 2015)
Supported devices and file formats
Made for.
iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
(as of July 2015)
En 121
■ File formats
❑ USB, PC/NAS
* Linear PCM format only
• To play back FLAC files stored on your PC/NAS, you need to install server software
that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports
FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below.
File
Sampling
frequency
(kHz)
quantization
bit (bit)
Bitrate (kbps)
Number of
channels
Support for
gapless
playback
WAV *
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 - 2 ✔
MP3 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
WMA 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
FLAC
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 - 2 ✔
ALAC
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96
16/24 - 2 ✔
AIFF
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 - 2 ✔
DSD
2.8 MHz/
5.6 MHz
1-2-
Video signal flow
HDMIHDMI
VIDEOVIDEO
HDMI HDMI
VIDEO VIDEO
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
VIDEO in VIDEO out
HDMI connection
Composite video connection
En 122
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.42)
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations)
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press SETUP.
c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.
d Press ENTER again.
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
ENTER
NOITPOPUTES
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAY
RETURN
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
N
O
I
T
P
O
TOP MEN
U
POP-UP/MENU
DI
S
PLAY
RETURN
BLUE
Y
ELL
OW
L
L
GREE
N
RE
D
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
Cursor keys
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Bluetooth
Language
Configuration
En 123
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.
f If you made a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit, use the
cursor keys (q/w) to select “TV Audio Input” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select
“AV 1”.
g Press SETUP.
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
5
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
7
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV.
• If you reconnect the HDMI cable, perform the procedure 5-8 again.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AV 1”and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
– “ARC” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the
instruction manual for the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital
optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.19).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• “AV 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks,
use “TV Audio Input” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function (p.42), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).
Configuration
HDMI Control
Audio Output
Standby Through
TV Audio Input
Standby Sync
ARC
SCENE
On
Auto
Auto
AV4
Auto
On
Back: RETURN
En 124
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz • 4K/60Hz (YCbCr4:2:0), 50Hz (YCbCr4:2:0)
En 125
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby,
Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.
Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS,
DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay,iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod
touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
This receiver supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™
Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance
®
.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of
Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha
Corporation is under license.
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
(For RX-S601D)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Trademarks
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
En 126
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 4
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 1
Coaxial x 2
•Video
Composite x 3
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 6
• Other jacks
- USB x 1 (USB2.0)
- NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
- NETWORK (Wireless) x 1 (IEEE802.11b/g/n)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
- Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R)
- Subwoofer Out x 1
- Headphone x 1
•Video
Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 1
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
HDMI
• HDMI Features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
(HDMI 6 jack: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
• Link Function: CEC supported
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[RX-S601 U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[RX-S601 other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
[RX-S601D U.K. and Europe models]
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[RX-S601D other models]
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
BLUETOOTH
BLUETOOTH version ...........................................Ver. 2.1+EDR
Supported profile .............................................. A2DP, AVRCP
Supported codec ..................................................... SBC, AAC
Wireless output ...................................... BLUETOOTH Class 2
Maximum communication distance
............................................... 10 m (33 ft) without interference
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• Wi-Fi function
- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection
and USB connection
- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed
Mode
- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz
- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Specifications
En 127
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- DTS Neo: 6 Music, DTS Neo: 6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
(
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6
Ω
)
Front L/R .................................................................60 W+60 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................55 W+55 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W
Center ............................................................................... 80 W
Surround L/R...........................................................80 W+80 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................65 W+65 W
Center ............................................................................... 65 W
Surround L/R...........................................................65 W+65 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R ...................................................................... 95 W/ch
Center ......................................................................... 95 W/ch
Surround...................................................................... 95 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ...................................................................... 80 W/ch
Center ......................................................................... 80 W/ch
Surround L/R................................................................ 80 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R.....................................................................100 W/ch
Center.........................................................................100 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................100 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R.....................................................................125 W/ch
Center.........................................................................125 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).....................................90/110/140/160 W
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω).............................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) .............................100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV 3 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV 3 etc. (DIRECT)
(Input
1 kΩ
Shorted, Speaker Out)
.........................................................................108 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
AV 3 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................ 70 dB/50 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround).................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
En 128
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ............... NTSC
[Other models]................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................50 dB or more
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono................................................................................ 65 dB
Stereo ..............................................................................64 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono................................................................................. 0.5%
Stereo ............................................................................... 0.6%
• Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section (RX-S601)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]
................................................. 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB Section (RX-S601D)
• Tuning Range ..........................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
• Support Audio Format
.......................... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG 4 HE AAC v2 (AAC+)
• Antenna .........................................................75 Ω unbalanced
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model] .............AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[China and Asia models].................................................170 W
[Other models] ................................................................190 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
.........................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off ........................................................1.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired ................................................................................1.7 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi) ...............................................................1.7 W
Wireless Direct .................................................................1.9 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On
(Wired), Bluetooth Standby On ........................................1.7 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On
.........................................................................................2.9 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models] .............................................400 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
..................... 435 x 111 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 4-3/8” x 12-7/8”)
• Reference Dimensions (with wireless antenna upright)
..................... 435 x 176 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 6-7/8” x 12-7/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Weight .............................................................7.8 kg (17.2 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
En 129
Symbols
Envelope icon (p)84
Lock icon (o)97
Numerics
2.1-channel system 14
2ch Stereo 45
4K Ultra HD 18
5.1-channel system 14
, 16
A
Adaptive DRC 81
ADVANCED SETUP 103
AirPlay 64
AM antenna connection 23
AM radio 48
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 92
, 123
Audio Decoder (front display information) 79
Audio Mode (DAB) 54
Auto Power Standby 96
Auto Preset (FM radio) 49
AUX jack 8
B
Banana plug 16
Bi-amp 17
, 88
Bluetooth 60
Bookmark 74
C
CINEMA DSP 44
Clear Preset (DAB radio, Option menu) 54
Clear Preset (FM radio, Option menu) 58
Compressed Music Enhancer 47
Crossover 27
, 89
D
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) 52
DAB information 54
DAB/FM antenna connection 23
Decoder Off (front display information) 79
Dimmer (Front Display) 97
DIRECT 47
DLNA 71
DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) (DAB) 54
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 100
DSP Program (front display information) 79
E
ECO 96
Ensemble Label (DAB) 54
Equalizer 90
Error indication (front display) 117
Extra Bass 47
, 89
F
Firmware update 105, 106
FM antenna connection 23
FM radio 48
FM radio tuning 56
Frequency (FM radio) 56
Frequency step setting 48
, 104
Front display information 79
H
HDCP 20, 113
HDMI signal compatibility 124
I
INFO key 8
Initial scan (DAB radio) 52
Input (front display information) 79
Input Trim 82
Internet radio 72
iPod content playback 61
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 64
L
Language 102
Lipsync 82
, 94
M
MAC Address 99, 100
Manual station preset (FM radio) 57
Max Volume 94
, 95
Memory Guard 97
Menu language selection 26
Multiple room playback 75
Multi-zone 75
Muting 41
N
NAS content playback 69
Network Connection 99
Network information 99
Network Name 100
Network Standby 100
O
Option menu 80
P
Party mode 77
PEQ 90
PHONES jack 8
Power Amp Assign 88
Preset station selection (DAB radio) 53
Preset station selection (FM radio) 58
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 50
Program Type (DAB) 54
R
Radio Data System tuning 51, 59
Registering favorite items (shortcut) 78
Remote control 11
Remote control sensor 8
Index
En 130
Remote ID 104
Rename 100
Repeat 63
, 68, 71
S
SCENE 42, 92
Setup menu 84
Shortcut 78
Shuffle 63
, 68, 71
Signal information 82
Sleep timer 11
Sleep timer (Zone2) 76
Sound program 44
Speaker impedance 13
, 15, 103
Standby indicator (front panel) 8
Standby Through 91
Station preset (DAB radio) 53
Station preset (FM radio) 57
Straight decode 46
Subwoofer Trim 82
Surround decoder 46
T
Test Tone 90
Tone Control 81
U
USB jack 8
USB storage device content playback 66
V
Video/audio input jack combination 21
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 14
, 45, 89
Volume scale 94
W
Wireless (Wi-Fi) 32, 99
Wireless Direct 39
, 99
WPS 32
, 34
Y
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 27
YPAO MIC jack 8
Z
Zone2 speaker connection 17, 75
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH024B0/EN
Documenttranscriptie
AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FEATURES 6 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 27 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 10 Connecting to a network wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 PREPARATIONS 12 PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Selecting a registered scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting Zone2 speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S601) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Connecting to the jack on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Listening to DAB radio (RX-S601D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Preparing the DAB tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Selecting a DAB radio station for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Displaying the DAB information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 5 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 6 Preparing for connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 En 41 2 Listening to FM radio (RX-S601D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Playing back music via BLUETOOTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Playback BLUETOOTH device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 103 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 En 84 3 APPENDIX 107 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-S601.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 DAB radio (RX-S601D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. AM antenna (RX-S601) FM antenna (RX-S601) *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. DAB/FM antenna (RX-S601D) YPAO microphone • The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-S601 (U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified. • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) • This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified. Easy Setup Guide • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Safety Brochure En 5 FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone • USB • Media server (PC/NAS) • Internet radio • AirPlay • BLUETOOTH . . . . . . Supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. p.61 p.66 p.69 p.72 p.64 p.60 • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.27 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) . p.44 • Enjoying compressed music with . p.47 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) • Playing back music in multiple rooms . p.75 Network contents Speakers Audio BLUETOOTH device Audio HDMI Control USB device 4K Ultra HD signal and HDCP 2.2 supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video Wireless connection to a network . p.24 AV receiver (the unit) TV Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.122 . p.42 TV remote control En 6 Full of useful functions! About “AV SETUP GUIDE” About “AV CONTROLLER” ❑ Connecting various devices (p.20) ❑ Application for tablets “AV SETUP GUIDE” ❑ Application for smartphone / tablets “AV CONTROLLER” A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, portable audio player, and other devices. AV SETUP GUIDE is an application that assists you with cable connections between AV receiver and source devices as well as AV receiver setup. This app guides you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and source device connections and assigning the power amp. ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.19) When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. AV CONTROLLER provides you the flexibility to control the available inputs, volume, mute and power commands. It lets users change a song from Internet Radio, USB and command FM/AM tuners or any other internally available source. Functions: Functions: 1) Connection support guide – Power on/off – Speaker connection – Volume up/down – TV/source devices connection – Mute The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you to create a 3-dimensional sound field that spreads up and deep in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). 2) Setup support guide – Music Play – Automatic network setup of HDMI, power amp assign, etc. – Input Selection ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.45) – Various setup assistance with illustrations. ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.44) You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in front. ❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.47) When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. – DSP Mode Selection – SCENE selection – YPAO setting guidance – Blu-ray player fundamental control 3) View owner’s manual – Seamless control between the Yamaha AV receiver and Blu-ray player * This application is for tablets only. – Demo mode - Explains how to use this app For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play. For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. ❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.48) (RX-S601) ❑ Listening to DAB radio (p.52) and FM radio (p.56) (RX-S601D) ❑ Low power consumption The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption and helps to create an eco-friendly home theater system (p.96). En 7 Part names and functions Front panel 1 INPUT 2 ZONE 3 4 5 VOLUME DIRECT INFO (WPS) SCENE PHONES YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA 6 1 ZONE key Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75). 2 INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.79). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.34). 3 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 4 Front display Displays information (p.9). 5 DIRECT key Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.47). 6 INPUT knob Select an input source. 7 z (power) key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 78 9: STRAIGHT PROGRAM BD/DVD TV NET RADIO (CONNECT) AUX AUDIO A B C 8 Standby indicator D 5V 1A E F D AUX jack Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.91) • Standby Through is enabled (p.91) • Network Standby is enabled (p.100) • An iPod is being charged (p.61) For connecting devices, such as portable audio players (p.22). E USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.66) or an iPod (p.61). F VOLUME knob 9 PHONES jack Adjusts the volume. For connecting headphones. 0 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.27). A STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.46). B PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.43). C SCENE keys Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.42). En 8 Front display (indicators) 1 2 CHARGE 3 5 6 4 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT 1 2 ECO 0 Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. 2 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.47) is working. 3 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.44) or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.44) is working. 4 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station (RX-S601) or FM radio station (RX-S601D) signal. 5 BLUETOOTH indicator Light up while the unit is connecting to a BLUETOOTH device. 8 9 PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE ZONE 2 A 3 B VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL A 1 HDMI 7 B C 6 PARTY D A E F E Speaker indicators Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.77) 7 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 8 MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. 9 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) L Subwoofer F ADAPTIVE DRC 0 ECO Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.81) is working. Lights up when the eco mode (p.96) is enabled. A Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. B Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.79). C Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless signal (p.31). D ZONE 2 Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.75). En 9 Rear panel 2 1 3 4 5 (RX-S601 U.S.A. model) NETWORK WIRELESS (NET) HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDCP2.2 HDMI 6 HDCP2.2 SPEAKERS VIDEO FRONT ANTENNA AV 3 VIDEO OPTICAL CENTER (RADIO) MONITOR OUT FM EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP AM VIDEO AV 1 (TV) AUDIO 2 75 AUDIO 3 VIDEO AV 2 AUDIO 1 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COAXIAL COAXIAL 6 7 8 1 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.19). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 2 HDMI 1–6 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.20). 3 NETWORK jack For a wired connection to a network (p.24). 4 Wireless antenna For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.24). 5 Power cable 9 0 A 7 MONITOR OUT jack For connecting to a TV and outputting video signals (p.19). 8 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.16). 9 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to the radio antennas (p.23). 0 SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.16). A VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.25). For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.25). 6 AV jacks AUDIO jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.20). En 10 * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device. 2 SLEEP key 2 B SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 3 1 2 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH 4 5 MAIN BD DVD TV PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION 9 E DISPLAY RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING PRESET F DIRECT ENHANCER BASS • You can assign the unit's functions to the RED/GREEN/ YELLOW/BLUE keys (p.98). 0 Radio keys Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.48). MEMORY Registers radio stations as presets. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. A Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.43). Turns on/off (standby) the unit. C PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.77). Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.75). 5 SCENE keys Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.42). D VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. E MUTE key Mutes the audio output. F OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.80). 6 PROGRAM keys STRAIGHT • The playback devices must support HDMI Control. However, Yamaha does not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. B z (receiver power) key 4 MAIN/ZONE 2 switch RETURN A D Select an input source for playback. You can select directly each input source by pressing the following keys. HDMI 1–6 HDMI 1–6 jacks AV 1–3 AV 1–3 jacks AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks FM FM radio AM or DAB AM radio (RX-S601) or DAB radio (RX-S601D) BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH devices USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET Network sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) AUX AUX jack (on the front panel) • Input selection keys that can be selected for Zone2 are underlined in blue. ENTER 0 C SCENE 6 8 AUX PARTY ZONE 2 Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). 3 Input selection keys AV 790 External device operation keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.43). 8 SETUP key Displays the setup menu (p.84). 9 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. En 11 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.13) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.16) Connect the speakers to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.19) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.20) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the radio antennas (p.23) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas or DAB/FM antenna to the unit. 6 Preparing for connecting to a network (p.24) 7 Connecting the power cable (p.25) Connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable. After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.26) Select the desired on-screen menu language. 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.27) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). 10 Connecting to a network wirelessly (p.31) Connect the unit to a network wirelessly. This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! En 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 6-ohm speakers. When connecting 8-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “8 Ω MIN”. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.15). • Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. • Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers. Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Front (L) Abbr. 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Subwoofer 9 5.1 5.1 (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Function Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. * Place the surround speakers in front and set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. • You can use the Zone2 function or bi-amp connections simultaneously with the 2.1- or 3.1-channel system. En 13 ● ● ●* ● ● ●* ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5.1-channel system 3.1-channel system 1 9 2 1 3 9 4 2 3 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). • You can place the subwoofer either in the left or right side. 2.1-channel system 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) 1 9 1 2 4 5 9 3 • To utilize this configuration, set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). • You can place the subwoofer either in the left or right side. En 14 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Setting the speaker impedance Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 6-ohm speakers. When connecting 8-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “8 Ω MIN”. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). STRAIGHT z (power) 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. CHARGE OUT 1 2 ECO 4 5 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE ZONE 2 A 3 B VOL. SP IMP.••6¬MIN ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press STRAIGHT to select “8 Ω MIN”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. En 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagram provides connections for 5.1-channel system as an example. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system. ■ Connecting speaker cables 5.1-channel system The unit (rear) Caution SPEAKERS FRONT • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. CENTER EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP SUBWOOFER PRE OUT • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. d Tighten the terminal. Cables required for connection (commercially available) + (red) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – b c FR ON T d + – 1 2 a - (black) Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer) Using a banana plug 9 3 (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) a Tighten the speaker terminal. b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. 4 a 5 Banana plug FR ON T b ■ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. Audio pin cable En 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and SURROUND/ZONE 2/BI-AMP jacks. Connecting Zone2 speakers Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.88) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. • Surround speakers or bi-amplified front speakers cannot be used while the Zone2 function is enabled. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER 1 The Zone2 function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). To connect the Zone2 speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)” (p.75). EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP 2 3 9 • Surround speakers or Zone2 speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. • The FRONT jacks and SURROUND/ZONE 2/BI-AMP jacks output the same signals. En 17 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ AUDIO jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks (Stereo L/R jacks) Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). AUDIO 2 Stereo pin cable HDMI cable Digital optical cable HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) OPTICAL AV 1 (TV) • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. ❑ COAXIAL jacks (Stereo mini jack) Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable. • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission (through output) features. • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. Digital coaxial cable AV 2 Stereo mini-plug cable AUX AUDIO ■ Video jacks ❑ VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. Video pin cable En 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Connecting a TV ■ Composite video connection Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. Connect the TV to the unit with a video pin cable and a digital optical cable. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) Video input (composite video) ■ HDMI connection VIDEO MONITOR OUT Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 VIDEO HDCP2.2 V V AV 3 VIDEO OPTICAL The unit (rear) VIDEO HDMI input HDMI OUT jack TV MONITOR OUT VIDEO AV 1 (TV) VIDEO AV 2 HDMI HDMI OUT ARC HDMI OUT HDCP2.2 ARC HDCP2.2 HDMI AUDIO 1 HDMI AV 3 VIDEO OPTICAL VIDEO COAXIAL (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 MONITOR OUT OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 1 (TV) TV VIDEO COAXIAL O O AV 1 (TV) AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack VIDEO AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL OPTICAL AUDIO 1 COAXIAL AV 1 (TV) O AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output (digital optical) O Audio output (digital optical) • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. • You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: • If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.122). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. En 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 Connecting playback devices ■ Composite video connection The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect a BLUETOOTH device, an iPod, or a USB storage device, see the following pages. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical, digital coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. – Connecting a BLUETOOTH device (p.60) – Connecting an iPod (p.61) Output jacks on video device – Connecting a USB storage device (p.66) Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Digital optical AV 1 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Composite video Digital coaxial AV 2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 3 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Video output (composite video) AV 1–3 (VIDEO) jack • If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.21). The unit (rear) VIDEO VIDEO V ■ HDMI connection HDMI OUT ARC V (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDCP2.2 Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. AV 3 VIDEO OPTICAL VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO AV 1 (TV) VIDEO AV 2 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDCP2.2 OPTICAL OPTICAL HDMI 1–6 jacks COAXIAL O AV 1 (TV) O Video device HDMI 6 AUDIO 1 COAXIAL L The unit (rear) L L R R R HDMI HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDCP2.2 HDMI 6 HDCP2.2 HDMI output VIDEO COAXIAL ANTENNA AV 3 VIDEO OPTICAL (RADIO) MONITOR OUT FM AM VIDEO HDMI AV 1 (TV) AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 VIDEO AV 2 AUDIO 1 COAXIAL AV 2 75 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT C C COAXIAL HDMI AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack, AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack, or AV 3 (AUDIO) jacks COAXIAL Audio output (digital optical, digital coaxial or analog stereo) Video device • If you connect a video device to the unit via composite video connection, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.20). • If you connect a video device to the unit via HDMI, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.19). • For the HDCP 2.2-compatible HDMI device, use the HDMI 6 jack to connect it. En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Video HDMI 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. 2 Press HDMI 2 to select “HDMI 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. Input jacks on the unit Audio Video Audio Digital optical HDMI 1–6 AV 1 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial HDMI 1–6 AUDIO 1 (COAXIAL) AV 2 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo SLEEP HDMI 2 5 6 1 2 PROGRAM ❑ Necessary setting MUTE TOP MENU 3 FM HDMI 2 VOLUME OPTION POP-UP/MENU OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Video output (HDMI output) HDMI 2 jack 4 SETUP For example, if you have connected a video device to HDMI 2 and AV 3 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. The unit (rear) 3 AV AV 3 (AUDIO) AUDIO 2–3 (AUDIO) HDMI 1–6 1 RETURN DISPLAY HDMI HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 4 HDMI AV 3 VIDEO OPTICAL VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO AV 1 (TV) AUDIO 2 VIDEO AV 2 AUDIO 3 Video device COAXIAL Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. CHARGE AUDIO 1 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE OUT ECO COAXIAL AUDIO VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Audio In L L L R R 5 R AV 3 (AUDIO) jacks Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV 3” (audio input jack to be used). CHARGE Audio output (analog stereo) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE OUT ECO 6 VOL. Audio••••••AV3 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press OPTION. This completes the necessary settings. If you select “HDMI 2” as the input source by pressing HDMI 2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. En 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connecting to the jack on the front panel Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable audio players to the unit. Audio output jacks on audio device Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. Audio input jacks on the unit Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 1 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 3 (AUDIO) AUDIO 2–3 (AUDIO) SCENE YPAO MIC STRAIGHT PROGRAM BD/DVD (CONNECT) TV NET RADIO AUX AUDIO 5V 1A The unit (front) Audio device The unit (rear) OPTICAL Portable audio player AV 1 (TV) HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 O O HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing AUX, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. OPTICAL AV 3 VIDEO OPTICAL VIDEO MONITOR OUT C VIDEO AV 1 (TV) C COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 VIDEO AV 2 COAXIAL • You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device. L AUDIO 1 COAXIAL L L R R R AV 1–3 jacks AUDIO 1-3 jacks • For details on how to connect an USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.66). Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) En 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 Connecting the radio antennas ■ FM/AM antennas (RX-S601) ■ DAB/FM antenna (RX-S601D) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. DAB/FM antenna AM antenna FM antenna The unit (rear) The unit (rear) HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDCP2.2 HDMI OUT HDMI 6 VIDEO (RADIO) MONITOR OUT FM VIDEO OPTICAL AM VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO 2 75 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDCP2.2 HDMI 6 ANTENNA (RADIO) MONITOR OUT DAB/FM 75 VIDEO AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 VIDEO VIDEO AV 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COAXIAL HDMI 2 AV 1 (TV) AV 1 (TV) AV 2 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 AV 3 ANTENNA AV 3 VIDEO OPTICAL ARC HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COAXIAL Assembling and connecting the AM antenna • The antenna should be stretched out horizontally. • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM antenna. Hold down Insert Release • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. En 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6 Preparing for connecting to a network Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. Connecting a network cable Preparing a wireless antenna Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). If you connect the unit wirelessly, erect the wireless antenna. Network Attached Storage (NAS) Internet For information on how to connect the unit to a wireless network, see “Connecting to a network wirelessly” (p.31). WAN Erect the wireless antenna. PC LAN Modem Wireless router LESS WIRE Network cable The unit (rear) NETWORK (NET) DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDCP2.2 HDMI 6 FRO ANTENNA (RADIO) MONITOR OUT FM AM VIDEO AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 75 • Do not apply excessive force on the wireless antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna. • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.99). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu. En 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS CENTER EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR 110V 220V 120V 240V After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) To an AC wall outlet SPEAKERS CENTER EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP En 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z SLEEP 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 3 FM Select the desired on-screen menu language. 1 2 AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. To continue the language setup, press RETURN. VOLUME MUTE SETUP POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER. DISPLAY RETURN RED 3 4 GREEN YELLOW L BLUE Setup RETURN MEMORY HOME Speaker English HDMI 日本語 Français Deutsch Español Русский Italiano Sound ECO TUNING PRESET Function Network Bluetooth STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER Language BASS 5 中文 Use the cursor keys to select the desired language. Setup Speaker English HDMI 日本語 Français Deutsch Español Русский Italiano Sound ECO Function Network Bluetooth Language 中文 En 26 6 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z SLEEP 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN 4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. AUX PARTY ZONE 2 TV • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. • Please note the following when using YPAO. SCENE BD DVD The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. NET RADIO – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE The unit (front) – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE – Do not connect headphones. – Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 3 minutes). 1 2 MEMORY 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 9 3 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). HOME 4 TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS 5 • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT Ear height The following screen appears on the TV. 9 Auto Setup MIN MAX MIN MAX Start Exit • When using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power AMP Assign” (p.88) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO. • When using the front 5.1-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration (p.14), set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu to “On” beforehand. En 27 Press SETUP key to Start Power Amp Assign Basic “Power AMP Assign” setting (p.88) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the measurement immediately. 6 AV 1 To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Start” and press SETUP. 2 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET 6 Press ENTER after confirming the measurement result. 7 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN • To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the procedure in “Error messages” (p.29). AUX PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET Auto Setup The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. RADIO Measurement Finished Start Exit SAVE Result 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / +10.0 dB Auto Setup PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE Start SETUP POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU Exit Measurement Finished 1 Result 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 2 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / +10.0 dB OPTION SETUP DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT 3 OK:ENTER Cursor keys ENTER ENTER PRESET ENHANCER RETURN The adjusted speaker settings are applied. 4 • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 8 1 The number of speakers (front side/rear side/subwoofer) Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. 2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest) 3 Adjustment range of speaker output level Caution 4 Warning message (displayed only if a problem occurs) • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). BASS • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.29) or “Warning messages” (p.30). • A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in the front display. • If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages. En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Auto Setup ERROR E-5:Noisy Start Error message Exit PROCEED 5% TV screen CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. E-5:NOISY ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Front display ■ Procedure to handle errors 1 Check the content of error message and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. Error message Cause E-1:No Front SP (E-1:NO FRNT SP) Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP (E-2:NO SUR SP) One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-5:Noisy (E-5:NOISY) The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-7:No MIC (E-7:NO MIC) The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. E-8:No Signal (E-8:NO SIGNAL) The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel (E-9:CANCEL) The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary. E-10:Internal Err. (E-10:INTERNAL) An internal error has occurred. Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. To exit the YPAO measurement: a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press ENTER. c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning: Select “RETRY” and press ENTER. To proceed with the current YPAO measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only): Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER. En 29 Remedy Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Auto Setup Result Exit 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / +10.0 dB OK:ENTER TV screen Problem speaker (blinks) OUT ECO W-1:PHASE A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). W-2:Over Distance (W-2:DISTANCE) A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL W-3:Level Error (W-3:LEVEL) Front display ■ Procedure to handle warnings • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 1 Check the content of warning message and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To save the measurement results: Select “SAVE” and press ENTER. To discard the measurement result: Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 3 If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable. W-1:Out of Phase (W-1:PHASE) Warning message W-1:Out of Phase ENHANCER STEREO TUNED Remedy Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. Measurement Finished Start CHARGE Cause Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. En 30 If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 Connecting to a network wirelessly ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.7) to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. • When you connect the unit to a router with a network cable, you need not do this procedure. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Mobile device (such as iPhone) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.39). You can also use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.7) to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.24) or the wireless LAN connection (p.32). Internet • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the unit cannot connect to the Internet. Therefore, you cannot use any kind of Internet service such as Internet radio. Wireless router • Also the mobile device cannot connect to the Internet, so we recommend you disconnect the mobile device from the unit. Modem Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.32). • You cannot use the wireless LAN connection simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.24) or Wireless Direct (p.39). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET 5 6 There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. 6 Select a connection method according to your environment. AV 1 Connecting the unit to a wireless network 2 Network Connection Connection AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch)? AUX Yes A (p.32) No OK:ENTER Back:RETURN SCENE TV PROGRAM NET RADIO Does your wireless router (access point) has a WPS button? VOLUME MUTE B (p.34) No SETUP C (p.35) OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT Yes 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS)” and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU RED Wireless ( Wi- Fi) PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER. DIRECT Wireless (Wi-Fi) ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. PRESET ENHANCER BASS 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 5 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. En 32 Select a setup method. WPS Button Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS) Access Point Scan Manual Setting PIN Code OK:ENTER Back:RETURN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET 5 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method. 6 AV 1 2 Share 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN Set- If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.) 1 for with AUX OK:ENTER Back:RETURN SCENE TV On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-Fi screen. iOS (example of English version) PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD Wi-Fi Select method sharing setting iOS device. Wireless (WAC) USB Cable AUDIO ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly NET RADIO The following connection methods are available. PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP Cursor keys ENTER ENTER USB Cable DISPLAY RETURN RED Wireless (WAC) OPTION GREEN YELLOW L BLUE You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”. (You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.) You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable”. (You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.) The name of the unit 2 Select the network (access point) of which you want to share the settings with the unit. iOS (example of English version) MEMORY Tap here to start setup HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER • When you use wired network connection, Wireless (WAC) is not available. • A wireless connection cannot be established using Wireless (WAC) if your wireless router (access point) uses WEP encryption. Try another connection method. BASS 9 The network currently selected Press ENTER to proceed to the next screen. When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to the selected network (access point). En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 3 FM 6 AV 1 2 ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable ■ B: Using the WPS button configuration If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit. You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. 1 1 2 AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. The unit (front) PARTY ZONE 2 TV NET RADIO AUDIO 5V 1A 3 PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU SETUP ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L 2 3 BLUE TUNING DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER Press ENTER on the remote control. Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. MEMORY HOME STRAIGHT If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. OPTION ENTER Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. SETUP TOP MENU Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. AUX SCENE BD DVD Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 4 • Depending on the model of the wireless router (access point), the unit may not connect to it. In this case, try connection with “Access Point Scan” or “Manual Setting” (p.35). • You can use “WPS Button” (p.35) in the “Setup” menu to set up a wireless connection with the WPS button. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. BASS About WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET 5 6 ■ C: Using other connection methods If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. AV 1 2 1 2 AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX PARTY ZONE 2 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired connection method and press ENTER. Wireless (Wi-Fi) Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Select a setup method. WPS Button Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS) Access Point Scan Manual Setting PIN Code OK:ENTER Back:RETURN SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. PROGRAM MUTE SETUP POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING The following connection methods are available. VOLUME 3 4 Press SETUP. WPS Button Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.32). 5 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.36). 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER. Manual Setting You can setup a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.37). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the WPS PIN code” (p.38). PRESET Network Connection STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS Connection Wireless ( Wi- Fi) OK:ENTER Back:RETURN En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Searching for an access point SLEEP If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 6 4 When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. AV 1 2 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET 1 AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point and press ENTER. The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET Access Point Scan RADIO SSID: Access Point X Security: WPA-PSK (AES) Security Key: PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE Connect SETUP OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED Edit:ENTER CANCEL:RETURN POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY 2 3 Press ENTER. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. HOME TUNING PRESET Network Connection ***_ STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS ( . 0 ← a n ) , 1 A b o [ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z OK CANCEL CLEAR Button functions [←]/[→]: Moves the cursor left and right. [Aa]: Switches the letter cases (upper/lower). [BKSP]: Deletes the character to the left of the selected one. [Space]: Enters a space. [DEL]: Deletes the selected character. When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. En 36 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press ENTER to start the connection process. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. 5 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually SLEEP If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET 5 You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. 6 AV 1 2 • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. 4 AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN Manual Setting AUX PARTY ZONE 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press ENTER. SSID: Access Point X Security: None • If you select “None” in step 3, this item is not available. Security Key: SCENE BD DVD TV 5 Connect NET RADIO Edit:ENTER CANCEL:RETURN PROGRAM SETUP POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER ENTER 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “SSID” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point. DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN If you select “WEP” in step 3, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. VOLUME MUTE YELLOW L If you select the method other than “WEP” in step 3, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. Network Connection **** ( . 0 ← a n BLUE MEMORY Network Connection HOME STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER ( . 0 ← a n BASS ) , 1 A b o [ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z [ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. OK CANCEL CLEAR 6 When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. 3 ) , 1 A b o OK CANCEL CLEAR 1a2b TUNING Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption method. Choices None, WEP, WPA-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode En 37 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from step 1. 7 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Using the WPS PIN code SLEEP If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 3 FM 6 1 AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point and press ENTER. The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. PARTY ZONE 2 PIN Code SCENE BD DVD TV NET P I N C od e : 00000000 RADIO Enter the PIN code into the access point. PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE OK:ENTER Back:RETURN SETUP POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED 2 GREEN YELLOW L Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). BLUE MEMORY 3 HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER Press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. BASS If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. En 38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET 5 2 7 Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. 6 AV 1 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) Choices None, WPA2-PSK (AES) AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. AUX PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET 1 2 RADIO VOLUME MUTE Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. 8 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). SETUP • If you select “None” in step 7, this item is not available. OPTION SETUP DISPLAY RETURN GREEN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY 3 4 HOME TUNING STRAIGHT Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU RED Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption method. DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER 9 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. Enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. Network Connection abc_ 5 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless Direct” and press ENTER. BASS ) , 1 A b o [ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z OK CANCEL CLEAR When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. Network Connection Connection ( . 0 ← a n Wireless Di rect • Before proceeding to the next step, record the following information. These information will be needed to configure the Wi-Fi setting of a mobile device. – SSID displayed on the TV screen OK:ENTER Back:RETURN – Security key you have just entered En 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Save” and SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 press ENTER to save the setting. 4 This completes the settings and “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 6 AV 1 2 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET Next, configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. AUX PARTY ZONE 2 For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. b Select the SSID displayed in step 9 from the list of available access points. VOLUME MUTE SETUP POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER ENTER 12 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. DISPLAY RETURN RED c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in step 9. GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS En 40 PLAYBACK SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 3 FM Basic playback procedure 6 AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN Input selection keys Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD 1 TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP VOLUME Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. MUTE For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. OPTION ENTER • Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S601) (p.48) RED • Listening to DAB radio (RX-S601D) (p.52) DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW L • Listening to FM radio (RX-S601D) (p.56) BLUE MEMORY • Playing back iPod music (p.61) HOME • Playing back music via BLUETOOTH (p.60) TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.66) BASS • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.69) • Listening to Internet radio (p.72) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.64) 4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu (p.81). En 41 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off with just one touch. AV 1 2 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN 1 Selecting a registered scene AUX SCENE TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SCENE 1 Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. • Select an input source (p.41) PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD Configuring scene assignments • Select a sound program (p.43) Press SCENE. • Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.47) The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE OUT ECO SETUP OPTION SCENE ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L HOME STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER HDMI 1 NET RADIO TUNER Sound program Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 5ch Stereo 5ch Stereo Compressed Off Music Enhancer On On On SCENE link playback On Off Off BLUE MEMORY TUNING AV 1 Input On BASS • The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. En 42 VOL. SET Complete ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Selecting the sound mode SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 3 FM The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN ❑ I want to enjoy viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, or games. PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET VOLUME MUTE • Select a sound program suitable for each video source by pressing PROGRAM repeatedly (p.44). RADIO PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION • Select a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback by pressing PROGRAM repeatedly (p.45). ❑ I want to enjoy multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. ENTER DISPLAY RETURN ❑ I want to enjoy listening to music sources or stereo playback. • Select a surround decoder in the “Option” menu (p.80). RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY ❑ I want to enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels. HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS • Switch to the straight decode mode by pressing STRAIGHT (p.46). ❑ I want to enjoy pure high fidelity sounds. • Enable the direct playback mode by pressing DIRECT (p.47). This mode reduces the electrical noise from other circuitry to allow you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. ❑ I want to enjoy enhanced bass sounds. • Enable Extra Bass by pressing BASS (p.47). En 43 ❑ I want to enjoy listening to compressed music. • Enable Compressed Music Enhancer by pressing ENHANCER (p.47). This mode lets you enjoy compressed music stored on a BLUETOOTH device or USB storage device with additional depth and breadth (p.47). • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (p.46) is automatically selected. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.9). Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. Sci-Fi ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Sound program • You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.81) in the “Option” menu. • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. En 44 ■ Sound programs suitable for music (MUSIC) ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side speakers. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in front. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. ■ Sound programs suitable for stereo playback (STEREO) You can select stereo playback. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 5ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.44) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.45) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “5ch Stereo” is selected. En 45 Enjoying unprocessed playback SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. 6 AV 1 2 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU 1 ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.118). 1 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select a surround decoder. The previously selected surround decoder is selected. You can change the surround decoder in “Sur.Decode” (p.80) in the “Option” menu. “SUR. DECODE” appears CHARGE ECO SETUP OPTION CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO ENTER VOL. STRAIGHT VOL. †‡Pro Logic ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL GREEN YELLOW L BLUE bPro Logic Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. bPLII Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for movies. bPLII Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for music. bPLII Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for games. Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music. MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT SLEEP MUTE DISPLAY RETURN RED SLEEP MUTE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS STRAIGHT • You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu. En 46 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 3 FM When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 6 AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN 1 PARTY ZONE 2 Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Press DIRECT. RADIO CHARGE PROGRAM OUT ECO VOLUME MUTE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. VOL. DIRECT Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “ENHANCER” lights up POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU CHARGE SETUP OPTION • When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER – Selecting sound programs – Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE SLEEP MUTE VOL. Enhancer On ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources. – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) MEMORY HOME – Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz – High-definition streaming audio TUNING PRESET DIRECT STRAIGHT ECO – Adjusting the tone control DISPLAY RETURN ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS BASS ENHANCER Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass) Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. 1 Press BASS. Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or disabled. • You can also use “Extra Bass” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu to enable/disable Extra Bass. En 47 • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.81) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S601) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. Selecting a frequency for reception AV 3 FM FM 2 3 AM AM USB NET 1 2 AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX PARTY ZONE 2 TV 1 NET Press FM or AM to select a band. “TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently selected is displayed. • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. SCENE BD DVD • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. CHARGE ECO Setting the frequency steps PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE 2 (Asia and General models only) POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. 1 2 DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY ECO When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). HOME STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. z (power) TUNING VOL. FM 87.50MHz Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. OUT Set the unit to standby mode. SLEEP MUTE Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency. CHARGE ENTER ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT RADIO TUNING • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception from “FM Mode” (p.80) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. BASS PROGRAM STRAIGHT 3 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”. CHARGE OUT ECO 4 5 • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.83) in the “Option” menu. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. TU••••FM50/AM9 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. En 48 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 4 6 AV 3 FM FM 1 2 3 AM AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX 1 2 AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION DISPLAY RETURN GREEN 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 3 Press OPTION. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RED • To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”. VOLUME MUTE ■ Registering radio stations automatically (Auto Preset) YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME RETURN MEMORY STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. Auto Preset Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.48) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED ENHANCER STEREO TUNED 01:FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset number VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Auto Preset The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the registration immediately. • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. CHARGE “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE SLEEP MUTE VOL. 02:Empty ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered VOL. 01:FM 87.50MHz ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. SLEEP MUTE To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. OUT ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ■ Registering a radio station manually ECO ECO 4 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT CHARGE OUT PRESET CHARGE OUT CHARGE TUNING When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset number from which to start the registration • To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just wait for 5 seconds). • To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. En 49 SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 3 FM FM AM 6 AV 1 2 ■ Selecting a preset station ■ Clearing preset stations Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. 2 3 Press OPTION. AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 CHARGE SCENE BD DVD TV OUT NET ECO RADIO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:FM 98.50MHz Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and press ENTER. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL CHARGE ECO PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Clear Preset • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. SETUP OPTION OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. CHARGE GREEN YELLOW L ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO DISPLAY RETURN RED 4 POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset station to be cleared BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING PRESET If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. PRESET CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER ECO BASS En 50 SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:Cleared ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 5 Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. 6 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Radio Data System tuning SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. 6 AV 1 2 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX PARTY ZONE 2 ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.49). OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RED 1 VOLUME MUTE RETURN 2 Press INFO (WPS) on the front panel. STRAIGHT DIRECT CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO BASS When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type • To cancel the search, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Item name PRESET ENHANCER ■ Receiving traffic information automatically Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. HOME TUNING • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. (U.K. and Europe models only) 4 About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. CHARGE OUT CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. CLASSICS ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. TP FM101.30MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Traffic information station (frequency) Information Program Service Program service name • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency En 51 Listening to DAB radio (RX-S601D) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 FM 2 3 DAB USB NET AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN DAB PROGRAM • To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored, select “Init Scan” (p.81) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will be cleared. • The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. NET • Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/. RADIO VOLUME MUTE • For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.23). OPTION ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW L Preparing the DAB tuning Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to perform an initial scan. BLUE HOME DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER 1 Press DAB to select the DAB band. Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station. CHARGE BASS ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE OUT ECO 2 VOL. • “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not available. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Secondary station Press ENTER to start an initial scan. OUT ECO ENHANCER OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE SLEEP MUTE VOL. BBC National ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL VOL. >>>------- 30% ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first DAB radio station as stored in station order. CHARGE ENHANCER OUT ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Daily Service CHARGE ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE • When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”. VOL. Press [ENTER] CHARGE ENHANCER OUT Press DAB to select the DAB band. The following message appears on the front panel if you have not performed an initial scan yet. TUNING CHARGE (RX-S601D) 1 2 ECO MEMORY TUNING Selecting a DAB radio station for reception You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial scan. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP STRAIGHT • You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.55). AUX SCENE TV RED • If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1 appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again. PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient transmission method. SLEEP MUTE VOL. BBC Radio 4 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL En 52 • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.83) in the “Option” menu. Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 3 FM You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 6 AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 2 3 DAB BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN DAB • You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands. PARTY ZONE 2 ■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 2 Press DAB to select the DAB band. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio station. CHARGE SCENE BD DVD TV NET ■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets RADIO Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number. PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception” (p.52) to tune into the desired DAB radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED 1 GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME MEMORY The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. CHARGE TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS ENHANCER OUT PRESET ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:BBC Radio 4 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset number • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. CHARGE ENHANCER OUT (RX-S601D) ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. 02:Empty ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use) En 53 ENHANCER OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. PRESET:01 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL • “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered. ■ Clearing preset DAB radio stations SLEEP Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 FM 2 3 DAB USB NET 5 6 AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN DAB AUX PARTY ZONE 2 1 2 3 Press DAB to select the DAB band. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and press ENTER. SCENE BD DVD TV CHARGE RADIO ECO VOLUME MUTE 4 POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION ENHANCER YELLOW L PRESET ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE SLEEP MUTE VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. CHARGE VOL. CHARGE ECO ENHANCER BASS ECO 5 6 SLEEP MUTE VOL. Classic Music ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Information SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:Cleared ENHANCER OUT ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 01:Clear? OUT ENHANCER ENHANCER Item name If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. MEMORY DIRECT Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. ECO Preset station to be cleared BLUE HOME STRAIGHT Press INFO (WPS) on the front panel. OUT Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. ECO DISPLAY TUNING Tune into the desired DAB radio station. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Clear Preset OUT RETURN SLEEP MUTE VOL. CHARGE GREEN 1 2 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RED The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned into a DAB radio station. CHARGE NET OUT PROGRAM Displaying the DAB information ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. (RX-S601D) Service Label Station name DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) Information on the current station Ensemble Label Ensemble name Program Type Station genre Date And Time Current date and time Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best]) DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name • Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio station. En 54 Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to 100 [best]). 6 2 3 FM 1 2 3 DAB BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX AUDIO MAIN DAB PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE 1 2 3 4 POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION Press DAB to select the DAB band. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Tune Aid” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB channel label. CHARGE OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER VOL. 5A Level: 80 DAB channel label GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING DIRECT 5 Frequency Channel label Frequency Channel label 174.928 MHz 5A 208.064 MHz 9D 176.640 MHz 5B 209.936 MHz 10A 178.352 MHz 5C 211.648 MHz 10B 180.064 MHz 5D 213.360 MHz 10C 181.936 MHz 6A 215.072 MHz 10D 183.648 MHz 6B 216.928 MHz 11A 185.360 MHz 6C 218.640 MHz 11B 187.072 MHz 6D 220.352 MHz 11C 188.928 MHz 7A 222.064 MHz 11D 190.640 MHz 7B 223.936 MHz 12A 192.352 MHz 7C 225.648 MHz 12B 194.064 MHz 7D 227.360 MHz 12C 195.936 MHz 8A 229.072 MHz 12D 197.648 MHz 8B 230.784 MHz 13A 199.360 MHz 8C 232.496 MHz 13B 201.072 MHz 8D 234.208 MHz 13C 202.928 MHz 9A 235.776 MHz 13D 204.640 MHz 9B 237.488 MHz 13E 206.352 MHz 9C 239.200 MHz 13F SLEEP MUTE ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Reception strength DISPLAY RETURN STRAIGHT ENHANCER OUT ECO RED The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. 4 AV 1 ■ DAB frequency information To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PRESET ENHANCER BASS (RX-S601D) En 55 Listening to FM radio (RX-S601D) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AV 1 3 FM 1 2 2 3 DAB BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX FM AUDIO MAIN Selecting a frequency for reception PARTY ZONE 2 1 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO Press FM to select the FM band. CHARGE ENHANCER OUT ECO PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE 2 POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP SLEEP MUTE VOL. FM 87.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. OPTION ENTER CHARGE OUT ECO DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOL. FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from an FM radio station. MEMORY HOME TUNING ENHANCER STEREO TUNED TUNING “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. BASS • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception from “FM Mode” (p.80) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.83) in the “Option” menu. (RX-S601D) En 56 Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 3 FM 6 AV 1 2 FM AUDIO 1 2 3 DAB BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. • To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. • You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands. PARTY ZONE 2 • To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just wait for 5 seconds). CHARGE SLEEP MUTE ENHANCER OUT ECO SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED ■ Registering FM radio stations automatically (Auto Preset) RADIO GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING PRESET RETURN MEMORY PRESET DIRECT ENHANCER Auto Preset ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ■ Registering an FM radio station manually Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset number. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function. 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.48) to tune into the desired FM radio station. 1 2 3 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. Press FM to select the FM band. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”. CHARGE STRAIGHT VOL. BASS ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE OUT ECO 4 The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Auto Preset CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset number The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the registration immediately. (RX-S601D) • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset CHARGE OUT ECO ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:FM 87.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO Preset number from which to start the registration SLEEP MUTE VOL. 02:Empty ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered En 57 SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 FM 2 3 DAB USB NET 5 6 AV 1 2 FM AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX PARTY ZONE 2 ■ Selecting a preset FM radio station ■ Clearing preset FM radio stations Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 2 Press FM to select the FM band. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired FM radio station. CHARGE SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM OUT ECO NET RADIO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED 1 2 3 SLEEP MUTE Press FM to select the FM band. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and press ENTER. VOL. 01:FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL CHARGE ECO VOLUME MUTE • “No Presets” appears when no FM radio stations are registered. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION ENHANCER OUT 4 VOL. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT RED ECO DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW L DIRECT ENHANCER 01:FM 98.50MHz CHARGE PRESET ENHANCER OUT ECO STRAIGHT VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. MEMORY PRESET SLEEP MUTE Preset station to be cleared BLUE HOME TUNING ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Clear Preset OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER SLEEP MUTE BASS (RX-S601D) En 58 SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:Cleared ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 5 Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. 6 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Radio Data System tuning (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.57). 2 Press INFO (WPS) on the front panel. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE OUT ECO VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. CLASSICS ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. En 59 Playing back music via BLUETOOTH SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can play back music files stored on a BLUETOOTH device (such as smartphones) on the unit. AV 1 3 FM 1 2 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX Playback BLUETOOTH device music on the unit AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 The unit SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET BLUETOOTH device (such as smartphones) RADIO VOLUME MUTE • To use the BLUETOOTH function, set “Bluetooth” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION 1 Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source. 2 On the BLUETOOTH device, select the unit from the available device list. A connection between the BLUETOOTH device and the unit will be made. DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW L If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”. BLUE 3 MEMORY HOME External device operation keys TUNING STRAIGHT • The unit does not support video playback via BLUETOOTH. • For details on supported BLUETOOTH devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.120). ENTER RED Follow the procedure below to establish a BLUETOOTH connection between a BLUETOOTH device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the BLUETOOTH device on the unit. BLUETOOTH DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER On the BLUETOOTH device, select a song and start playback. The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is displayed on the TV. BASS • If the unit detects the BLUETOOTH device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the BLUETOOTH device after Step 1. To establish another BLUETOOTH connection, first terminate the current BLUETOOTH connection. • To terminate the BLUETOOTH connection, perform one of the following operations. – Perform the disconnect operation on the BLUETOOTH device. – Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit. – Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.87) in the “Setup” menu. • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 60 Playing back iPod music SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. AV 1 2 You can also play back iPod music in other methods. For details, see the following pages. AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX USB TV • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. • AV CONTROLLER (P.7) SCENE BD DVD • Playing back music with AirPlay (P.64) • Playing back music stored on a BLUETOOTH device (P.60) PARTY ZONE 2 NET • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. RADIO Playback of iPod content PROGRAM MUTE • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.120). You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Connecting an iPod • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.63). OPTION Cursor Cursor keys keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP RED • You cannot play back iPod video on the unit. VOLUME DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER DISPLAY RETURN Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. 1 2 • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. 1 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen (p.62) is displayed on the TV. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. BASS • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. The unit (front) 2 AUX AUDIO 5V Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 1A If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.62) is displayed. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.63). SLEEP MUTE VOL. Connected ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL En 61 ■ Browse screen ■ Playback screen SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 1 4 6 AV 1 2 3 FM AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN 1 4 iPod Music 2 Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers 3 PARTY ZONE 2 iPod Now Playing Artist Name 5 Album Name 2 Song Title 2:30 1/6 5:10 [DISPLAY] : Screen Off [DISPLAY] to Now Playing SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 List name 1 Status indicators 2 Contents list PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. GREEN YELLOW L Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. 4 Status indicators Use the following remote control keys to control playback. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.63) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER External device operation keys 2 Playback information 3 Item number/total Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. BLUE Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.63) and playback status (such as play/pause). Icon Function External device operation keys a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Moves 10 pages backward. f Moves to the previous page of the list. g BASS Function Skips forward/backward. h Moves to the next page of the list. j Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. • A content name of a current playback is displayed on the front display. To switch the displayed item, press INFO (p.79). • A content selected by the cursor is displayed on the front display. En 62 ■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 3 FM 1 2 6 AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN TV PROGRAM NET RADIO 3 VOLUME MUTE Use the cursor keys to select “iPod Mode” and press ENTER. To display the TV menu screen, select “iPod Mode” and press ENTER again. SCENE BD DVD You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod. Press OPTION. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. PARTY ZONE 2 ■ Repeat/shuffle settings • During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod. 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. Operate your iPod itself to start playback. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Cursor keys keys Cursor ENTER Item RETURN Repeat (Repeat) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. DISPLAY RETURN RED 3 OPTION GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER Shuffle (Shuffle) BASS 4 En 63 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music with AirPlay Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on the unit via network. Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. iTunes 1 PC Router Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( The unit iTunes (example) iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example) ) appears. iPod iOS6 (example) (Wired network or wireless network) iPhone/iPad/iPod touch • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.24). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu. 2 On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. 3 Select a song and start playback. • If the iPod does not recognize the unit, check your network environment (p.24). • This section describes “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.120). • The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. En 64 ■ Playback screen SLEEP • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 1 2 3 FM 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN TV NET 2 Song Title 5:30 Caution • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. SCENE BD DVD Album Name 2:30 PARTY ZONE 2 Artist Name • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock (Interlock)” (p.83) in the “Option” menu to “Off”. AUDIO 1 1 AirPlay Now Playing • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu. 6 AV RADIO 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP Use the following remote control keys to control playback. OPTION External device operation keys ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f External device operation keys g BASS En 65 Skips forward/backward. Playing back music stored on a USB storage device SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Playback of USB storage device contents AV 1 3 FM 1 2 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. AUDIO MAIN USB PARTY ZONE 2 TV PROGRAM NET RADIO 1 VOLUME MUTE • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. SETUP • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. 1 The unit (front) POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Connecting a USB storage device SCENE BD DVD • For details on playable USB devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.120). Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen (p.67) is displayed on the TV. OPTION AUX Cursor Cursor keys keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY AUDIO 5V • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. 1A DISPLAY 2 RETURN HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.67) is displayed. PRESET ENHANCER Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. BASS USB storage device • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. En 66 ■ Browse screen ■ Playback screen SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 1 4 AV 1 2 3 FM 3 AM AUDIO 1 2 USB BLUETOOTH MAIN NET 2 AUX USB Now Playing Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 3 PARTY ZONE 2 4 USB Top 1 Artist Name 5 Album Name Song Title 2 2:30 1/12 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing [DISPLAY] : Screen Off SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 List name Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.68) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Contents list PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE SETUP Cursor keys keys ENTER GREEN YELLOW L Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.68) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu DISPLAY RETURN Use the following remote control keys to control playback. 4 Status indicators OPTION ENTER Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING PRESET 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. 3 Item number/total POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU RED Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. External device operation keys Icon Function External device operation keys Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f Moves 10 pages backward. g Skips forward/backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS Moves to the next page of the list. • A content name of a current playback is displayed on the front display. To switch the displayed item, press INFO (p.79). Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. • A content selected by the cursor is displayed on the front display. En 67 ■ Repeat/shuffle settings SLEEP You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB storage device contents. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET 5 6 AV 1 2 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. PROGRAM MUTE 3 POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION Item Repeat (Repeat) DISPLAY RETURN GREEN Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Cursor keys keys Cursor ENTER ENTER RED • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. VOLUME YELLOW L BLUE Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. RETURN MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER Shuffle (Shuffle) BASS 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 68 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.24). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu. • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.120). 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Media sharing setup • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. En 69 ■ Browse screen Playback of PC music contents SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 6 You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AV 1 2 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX TV RADIO VOLUME MUTE OPTION Cursor Cursor keys keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT 1/14 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing PRESET ENHANCER BASS 2 Contents list Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 3 Item number/total POP-UP/MENU SETUP RED 5 1 List name Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen (p.70) is displayed on the TV. TOP MENU Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. NET 1 PROGRAM 4 SERVER NAS A 3 • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. SCENE BD DVD 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 1 Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. 4 DISPLAY RETURN • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.71) is displayed. 4 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.71) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. Moves to the next page of the list. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Moves 10 pages forward. • To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. Moves to the playback screen. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. En 70 ■ Playback screen ■ Repeat/shuffle settings SLEEP You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC music content. HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 1 SERVER Now Playing 6 AV 1 2 3 Artist Name FM AUDIO 1 2 MAIN 3 USB BLUETOOTH AM NET Song Title 2:30 AUX PARTY ZONE 2 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. 2 Album Name [DISPLAY] : Screen Off SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO 1 Status indicators MUTE 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION DISPLAY RETURN RED OPTION Cursor Cursor keys keys ENTER ENTER GREEN YELLOW L BLUE RETURN MEMORY HOME TUNING PRESET External device operation keys Use the following remote control keys to control playback. External device operation keys DIRECT ENHANCER • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Repeat (Repeat) f g STRAIGHT • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.71) and playback status (such as play/pause). VOLUME Skips forward/backward. Shuffle (Shuffle) BASS • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.100). En 71 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Listening to Internet radio SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 FM 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET AUX NET PARTY ZONE 2 TV • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.24). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu. 2 • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE BD DVD 1 • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. AUDIO 1 NET RADIO • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE Cursor Cursor keys keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED Follow the procedure below to select an Internet radio station and start playback. OPTION GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY 3 Item number/total 1 5 Operation menu RETURN Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. PRESET 2 DIRECT ENHANCER BASS 4 Playback indicator DISPLAY The browse screen (p.72) is displayed on the TV. STRAIGHT Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the TV screen. HOME TUNING 1/7 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing 2 Contents list POP-UP/MENU SETUP 5 1 List name Playback of Internet radio TOP MENU Bookmarks Locations Genres New Stations Popular Stations Podcasts Help 3 • This service may be discontinued without notice. 4 NET RADIO Top Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.73) is displayed. Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Moves to the playback screen. • To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. En 72 ■ Playback screen SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 1 NET RADIO Now Playing 6 AV 1 2 3 FM 3 AM Station Name AUDIO 1 USB BLUETOOTH MAIN 2 Album Name 2 NET Song Title 2:30 AUX PARTY ZONE 2 [DISPLAY] : Screen Off SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU • Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback. SETUP OPTION • Some information may not be available depending on the station. ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY External device operation keys HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS En 73 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder. 4 6 3 AV 1 3 FM 1 2 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX ■ Registering the station with the Option menu AUDIO MAIN You can switch the language. Follow the procedure below to register your favorite station to the “Bookmarks” folder. PARTY ZONE 2 Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET VOLUME MUTE While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING OPTION Cursor Cursor keys keys ENTER ENTER RED 1 2 RADIO • On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. On the browse screen, the station selected in the list is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the folder and then “Bookmark Off”. ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website PRESET You can also register your favorite Internet radio stations on the vTuner website. STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER Enter the vTuner ID in this area. • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. BASS 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Check the vTuner ID of the unit. You can find the vTuner ID in “Information” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu. En 74 • To remove the station from the “My_Favorites” folder, select “My_Favorites” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). Preparing Zone2 For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.88) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Study room (Zone2) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS FRONT EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP CENTER Living room (main zone) • Analog audio sources (including FM/AM or DAB/FM radio), Bluetooth, USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 3 or AUDIO 2–3 jacks) of the unit. • The party mode (p.77) allows you to play back the same audio output in main zone as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type. 1 9 2 FL FR 3 Zone2 Main zone En 75 z SLEEP Controlling Zone2 4 HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 SLEEP AV 1 2 3 FM AUDIO 1 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX MAIN Input selection keys 1 2 MAIN/ ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD Set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press z (receiver power). For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S601) (p.48) When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE 2” lights up in the front display. • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.60) PARTY ZONE 2 TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP • You can enable/disable Zone2 output using the ZONE key on the front panel (p.8). VOLUME MUTE ENTER 3 DISPLAY GREEN YELLOW L • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.69) AV 3: AV 3 (audio) jacks • Listening to Internet radio (p.72) AUDIO 2–3: AUDIO 2–3 jacks • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.64) FM: FM radio AM: AM radio (RX-S601) BLUE MEMORY HOME STRAIGHT • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display to control Zone2. DAB: DAB radio (RX-S601D) TUNING DIRECT BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) PRESET ENHANCER BASS • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.66) Use the following keys to select an input source. AUX: AUX jack RED • Listening to DAB/FM radio (RX-S601D) (p.52) • Playing back iPod music (p.61) OPTION RETURN Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. DIRECT USB: USB jack NET: Network sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) • You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. • An input source for Zone2 can only be selected using the input selection keys on the remote control. • It is useful to assign the frequently-used input to the SCENE key (p.77). En 76 • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. • Zone2 output is disabled when DIRECT is pressed to enable direct playback mode. Press DIRECT to disable direct playback mode, and follow the procedure from step 2 to enable Zone2 output. • To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of time. • To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE. • To play back DSD audio in Zone2, enable the party mode (p.77). Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 3 4 6 AV 1 3 FM 1 2 2 3 AM BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX AUDIO MAIN Input Inputselection selection keys keys PARTY ZONE 2 PARTY SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO SCENE ■ Selecting the input source with the SCENE function ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) You can use the SCENE function to select the input source for Zone2 playback. The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. • To use the SCENE function in Zone2, you must configure scene assignments separately from the main zone settings. • You can register only the input source to the SCENE key. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION MAIN/ ZONE 2 – NET: NET RADIO Set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”. • The party mode is not available when the unit is in direct playback mode. Press SCENE. The input source registered to the corresponding scene is selected and Zone2 output is enabled. ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. – RADIO: TUNER 1 2 GREEN YELLOW L BLUE ❑ Configuring scene assignments MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS 1 2 3 Press PARTY. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. – BD/DVD: AV 3 – TV: AUDIO 2 PROGRAM 1 Set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”. Select a Zone2 input source. Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. En 77 Useful functions SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET 5 Registering favorite items (shortcut) 6 AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN AUX PARTY ZONE 2 BLUETOOTH USB NET You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO • You can also use the “Bookmark” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.74). • BLUETOOTH and AirPlay are applied to the input source. You cannot register particular songs in the device individually. PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE ■ Recalling a registered item Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number. 1 2 Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB. Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired item. CHARGE OUT ECO ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:USB ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ■ Registering an item POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number. OPTION 1 2 ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER • The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases. Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. – A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to this unit. Hold down MEMORY for 3 seconds. – A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network. CHARGE ENHANCER OUT ECO MEMORY – The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service. SLEEP MUTE – The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location. VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 01:Empty – A BLUETOOTH connection cannot be established. • When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again. Shortcut number (flashes) PRESET BASS • To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET to select the shortcut number after step 2. CHARGE ENHANCER OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. 02:Empty ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered 3 • “No Presets” appears when no items are registered. To confirm the registration, press MEMORY. En 78 Switching information on the front display 1 Press INFO (WPS) on the front panel. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE OUT ECO VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Audio Decoder Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. †‡Pro Logic ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Information • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item HDMI AV AUX AUDIO Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) BLUETOOTH USB SERVER AirPlay Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) During simple playback of iPod: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) NET RADIO Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER (FM/AM) Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.51, 59). TUNER (DAB) See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.54) for details. * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. En 79 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) Option menu items You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE OUT ECO • Default settings are underlined. VOL. Input Select ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL • Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available. For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM. Item Input Select (Input) Front display Tone Control (Tone Control) Option Input Select Tone Control DSP/Surround Volume Trim Lipsync DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) Signal Info Audio In TV screen 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Enhancer (Enhancer) Input Trim (In.Trim) Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Lipsync (Lipsync) • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Program (PRG) Sur.Decode (SrDec) DSP Level (DSP Level) Signal Info (Signal Info) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Audio In (Audio) Video Out (Video) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. FM Mode (FM Mode) Auto Preset (Auto Preset) Clear Preset (Clear Preset) Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) iPod Mode (iPod Mode) En 80 Function Switches the input source. Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. Select the sound programs and stereo playback. Select which surround decoder is used when Sur.Decode is selected as the program. Page 81 81 44 46 Adjusts the sound field effect level. 81 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 81 Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 81 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 82 Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 82 Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup” menu. Displays information about the video/audio signal. Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio reception. Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets. Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. Switches the iPod operation mode. 82 82 82 83 48, 56 49, 57 50, 58 51 63 Item Repeat (Repeat) Shuffle (Shuffle) Volume Interlock (Interlock) Bookmark On (Bookmark On) Bookmark Off (Bookmark Off) Init Scan (Init Scan) Tune Aid (Tune Aid) ■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) Function Page Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.63), — USB storage device (p.68), or media server (p.71). Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.63), — USB storage device (p.68), or media server (p.71). Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod 83 via AirPlay. Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the “Bookmarks” folder, or removes it from the 74 “Bookmarks” folder. (RX-S601D only) 52 Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception. (RX-S601D only) 55 Checks reception strength of each DAB channel. Configures the sound field program and surround settings. ❑ DSP Level (DSP Level) Adjusts the sound field effect level. Setting range -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB ❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. ■ Input Select (Input) Settings Switches the input source. Press ENTER to switch to the selected input source. Choices HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3, TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, Airplay, (network sources), Bluetooth, AUX On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) ❑ Enhancer (Enhancer) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.47). Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.47). Settings • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay, (network sources), Bluetooth: On (On) Others: Off (Off) En 81 ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) ■ Signal Info (Signal Info) Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. Displays information about the video/audio signal. Choices ❑ Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal Channel (CHANNEL) The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE. Sampling (SAMPLING) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Bitrate (BITRATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal ❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Video In (VIDEO IN) Type and resolution of the input digital signal Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Video Out (VIDEO OUT) Type and resolution of the output digital signal Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) ■ Lipsync (Lipsync) • To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly. Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu. ■ Audio In (Audio) Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–6 or AV 1–3) with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output Settings Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment. On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment. • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (such as game consoles) Default AirPlay: Off (Off) Others: On (On) Input sources HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3 ■ Setup procedure See “Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks” (p.21). En 82 ■ Video Out (Video) Selects a video to be output with the selected audio source. For example, you can watching the video while listening to the radio. Input sources TUNER, USB, Bluetooth, AUX Settings Off (Off) Does not output video. HDMI 1–6, AV 1–3 Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. ■ Volume Interlock (Interlock) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Settings Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited (Ltd) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20 dB and mute). Full (Full) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). En 83 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 4 5 • If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen. 1 2 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Network Bluetooth Language 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Network Bluetooth Language • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. En 84 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Setup menu items Menu Item Configuration Speaker Function Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 88 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 88 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 88 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 88 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 89 Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 89 Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 89 Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. 89 Virtual CINEMA FRONT Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. 89 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 89 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 90 Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 90 Enables/disables the test tone output. 90 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 91 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 91 Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 91 Test Tone HDMI Page Configuration TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 91 Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 92 ARC Enables/disables ARC. 92 SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 92 En 85 Menu Item DSP Parameter Function Page CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 93 Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 93 Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 93 Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 93 Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 93 Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 94 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 94 Scale Switches the scale of the volume display. 94 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 94 Main Zone Max Volume Sets the main zone maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 94 Lipsync Sound Volume Auto Power Standby Main Zone Initial Volume Sets the main zone initial volume when the unit is turned on. 94 Zone2 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 95 Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume when the Zone2 output is enabled. 95 Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 96 ECO ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 96 Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 97 Input Skip Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT knob on the front panel. 97 Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 97 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 97 Remote Color Key Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. 98 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 98 Information Displays the network information on the unit. 99 Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 99 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 99 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 100 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 100 Function Network Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 100 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 100 Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. 101 En 86 Menu Item Function Bluetooth Bluetooth Audio Receive Bluetooth Standby Language Disconnect Page Enables/disables the BLUETOOTH functions. 101 Terminates the BLUETOOTH connection between the BLUETOOTH device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 60 Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from BLUETOOTH devices (BLUETOOTH standby). 101 Select an on-screen menu language. 102 En 87 Speaker Configures the speaker settings manually. Front Selects the size of the front speakers. • Default settings are underlined. Settings ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Power Amp Assign • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Selects a speaker system. In addition to the 5.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the Zone2 speakers or bi-amp connection. Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Settings Basic Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection). BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp connections (p.17). Zone2 Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.75) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone. Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. Settings Use Select this option when a subwoofer is connected. The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. En 88 Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Surround Extra Bass Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Settings Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Settings Off Disables Extra Bass. On Enables Extra Bass. • You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass (p.47). Virtual CINEMA FRONT Crossover Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers. Settings Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. Subwoofer Phase ■ Distance Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Settings Does not reverse the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. Disables the front 5-channel speaker configuration. Enables the front 5-channel speaker configuration. • Select “On” only when utilizing the Virtual CINEMA FRONT configuration (p.14). • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. Normal Off On Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft) Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) En 89 ■ Level 3 Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Equalizer EQ Select GEQ Edit Channel 63Hz 160Hz 400Hz 1kHz 2.5kHz 6.3kHz 16kHz Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB Others: -1.0 dB ■ Equalizer GEQ Front L Back:RETURN Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 4 EQ Select Selects the type of equalizer to be used. ■ Test Tone Settings PEQ Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO measurement (p.27). GEQ Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Off Does not use the equalizer. Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Settings • “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.27). ■ Manual equalizer adjustment 1 2 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired speaker channel. En 90 Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. HDMI Configures the HDMI settings. Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–6) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). • Default settings are underlined. ■ Configuration Settings HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.122). Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”. Off (When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. Auto Automatically selects whether to output videos/audio depending on the status of the connected device. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.122) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. Settings AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. Default AV1 • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. Amp • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On Enables the audio output from the speakers. HDMI OUT (TV) Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. En 91 Standby Sync SCENE Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. • TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device • Playback device: starting playback Choices (SCENE keys) BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO Settings ARC Enables/disables ARC (p.19) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. Default BD/DVD, TV: On NET, RADIO: Off • SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. En 92 Sound Configures the audio output settings. Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. • Default settings are underlined. ■ DSP Parameter Setting range -3 to 0 to +3 Configures the surround decoder settings. CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Center Image Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.44). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo). Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected. Settings Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. Setting range 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is enabled, you can wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Settings Off Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Setting range 0 to 3 to 7 En 93 ■ Lipsync ■ Volume Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Configures the volume settings. Scale • You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.82) in the “Option” menu. Switches the scale of the volume display. Select Settings Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit. Setting range 0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0.5 to 97.0). Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Min/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. • “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit. Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”. Main Zone Max Volume Sets the main zone maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Main Zone Initial Volume Sets the main zone initial volume when the unit is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output. -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Sets the level to the specified volume level. (0.5 dB increments) En 94 Zone2 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.88) is set to “Zone2”. Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume when the Zone2 output is enabled. Settings Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output. -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Sets the level to the specified volume level. (0.5 dB increments) • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.88) is set to “Zone2”. En 95 ECO Configures the power supply settings. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Auto Power Standby Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time. 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. Default U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 minutes Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. ■ ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. • Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. En 96 Function Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. 6 ■ Input Skip • Default settings are underlined. Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT knob on the front panel. ■ Input Rename You can select the desired input source quickly by skipping unnecessary input sources. Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. You can also select a name from the presets or a name created by the Auto Rename function. Input sources HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3, TUNER, USB, NET, Bluetooth, AUX Input sources HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3, USB, Bluetooth, AUX Settings Default HDMI 1–6: Auto Others: Manual (For USB, Bluetooth, AUX only “Manual” can be selected.) 3 Off Does not skip the selected input source. On Skips the selected input source. ■ Dimmer ■ Procedure 1 2 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Manual” and press ENTER. • To select a name from the presets, after selecting “Manual”, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name. • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.96) is set to “On”. • When selecting “Auto”, the unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device. You can check a created name by pressing ENTER. ■ Memory Guard • During selecting “Auto”, the created name is saved even after the device connection is terminated. To reset to the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual” at once and then set it again to “Auto”. Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings Press ENTER. The edit screen is displayed. Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Input Rename HDMI ( . 0 ← a n ) , 1 A b o • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. [ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z 4 Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “OK” to confirm the new name. 5 To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 4. o Memory Guard OK CANCEL CLEAR Memory Guard On Back:RETURN En 97 Icon ■ Remote Color Key Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. Settings Default Assigns the functions of playback devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. Input Assigns the unit's input sources to each key. The assigned input sources can be set separately. Input sources HDMI 1–6, AUDIO 1–3, AV 1–3, TUNER, USB, NET, Bluetooth, AUX Default RED: HDMI 2, GREEN: HDMI 6, YELLOW: AV 2, BLUE: AUX Program Sound modes are assigned to keys as follows. RED: MOVIE GREEN: MUSIC YELLOW: STEREO BLUE: SUR.DECODE For example, if you press the RED key repeatedly, you can select your favorite sound program from the sound programs (MOVIE) (p.44) suitable for the video source. ■ Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.77). Settings Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. En 98 Network ■ IP Address Configures the network settings. Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). • Default settings are underlined. DHCP ■ Information Select whether to use a DHCP server. Displays the network information on the unit. Settings Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack Connection Connection method SSID The access point to which the unit is connected Security The encryption method for your network MAC address IP address Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner) On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). 1 2 MAC Address (Wi-Fi) Subnet Mask Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. ■ Manual network settings MAC Address (Ethernet) IP Address Off ■ Network Connection Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable. Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.32). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.39). En 99 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Selects the network connection method. Choices Set “DHCP” to “Off”. ■ MAC Address Filter ■ Network Standby Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings • Operation of the AirPlay function (p.64) or the DMC is not limited by this setting. Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Enables the network standby function. (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.) Filter Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings Off Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ■ Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. MAC Address 1–10 ■ Procedure Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. 1 2 ■ Procedure 1 2 3 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “OK” to confirm the new name. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10). Network Name Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. Y a m a h a ( . 0 ← a n To exit from the menu, press SETUP. ■ DMC Control ) , 1 A b o [ x x x x x x _ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z OK CANCEL CLEAR Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 3 Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. En 100 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. ■ Network Update Bluetooth Updates the firmware via the network. Configures the BLUETOOTH settings. Perform Update ■ Bluetooth Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.106). Enables/disables the BLUETOOTH function (p.60). Settings Firmware Version Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit. Off Disables the BLUETOOTH function. On Enables the BLUETOOTH function. System ID ■ Bluetooth Standby Displays the system ID number. Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from BLUETOOTH devices (BLUETOOTH standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a connect operation is performed on the BLUETOOTH device. Settings Off Disables the BLUETOOTH standby function. On Enables the BLUETOOTH standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) • This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.100) is set to “Off”. En 101 Language Select an on-screen menu language. • Default settings are underlined. Settings English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Русский Russian Italiano Italian 中文 Chinese • Japanese and Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. En 102 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) ADVANCED SETUP menu items Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Set the unit to standby mode. • Default settings are underlined. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). Item z (power) PROGRAM STRAIGHT 3 4 5 Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. Function Page SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 103 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 104 TU (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 104 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 104 INIT Restores the default settings. 104 UPDATE Updates the firmware. 105 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 105 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. SP IMP.••6¬MIN ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings En 103 6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. 8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) CHARGE SLEEP MUTE REMOTE ID••ID1 ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL SLEEP MUTE VOL. TV FORMAT•NTSC ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV. Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images on the TV screen do not appear correctly. Settings ID1, ID2 Settings NTSC, PAL ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control 1 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT VOL. Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (BD/DVD) for more than 3 seconds. To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (TV) for more than 3 seconds. Restoring the default settings (INIT) Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO (Asia and General models only) SLEEP MUTE VOL. INIT••••CANCEL ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Restores the default settings for the unit. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE Choices VOL. TU••••FM50/AM9 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. En 104 ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. Updating the firmware (UPDATE) CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE VOL. UPDATE•••••USB ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO (WPS) to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. Checking the firmware version (VERSION) CHARGE OUT ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. VERSION••xx.xx ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. En 105 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 FM 2 3 AM USB NET New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AV 1 2 AUDIO 1 BLUETOOTH MAIN • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO • If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.105). VOLUME MUTE SETUP POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys keys ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING • To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.105). • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. OPTION SETUP • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.105). A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after SETUP is pressed. PRESET Network Update STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS New firmware available. Press ENTER to update now. (You can also start the update from the “Setup-Network” screen.) Language CANCEL : RETURN English You can switch the language. 1 2 If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press z (power) on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. Note AUX PARTY ZONE 2 3 Read the on-screen description and press ENTER. To start the firmware update, press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. En 106 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... HDMI Control does not work at all... To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.122). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize the speaker settings again (p.27). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.88). We want to set limitations on the volume control... I want to change the input source name... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Main Zone Max Volume” and “Zone2 Max Volume”in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.94). Input names displayed on the front panel can be changed using “Input Rename” in the setup menu. Change input names by entering names manually, or by selecting preset names (such as “Blu-ray” or “DVD”) (p.97). I want to fix the volume when turning on the unit... I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Main Zone Initial Volume” and “Zone2 Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.94, 95). You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.97). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... The volume varies depending on the input sources... You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.82). When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.104). En 107 I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode… I want to customize the unit... Various functions to customize the unit are available. If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. • SCENE settings (p.42) • Sound/video settings and signal information for each source (p.80) • Various function settings (p.85) • System settings (p.103) The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.21). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.94). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.91). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.26). I want to update the firmware... Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.105). En 108 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.16). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.96). The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.103). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.16). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) En 109 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. An input source cannot be selected using the INPUT knob on the front panel. The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control do not function. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.104). The remote control is set to the Zone2 operation mode. Set the remote control to the Main zone operation mode (p.75). The “Input Skip” function has been applied to that input source. Set the “Input Skip” function in the setup menu (p.97) to “Off” for that input source, or select the input source using the input selection key on the remote control. The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not support the function of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys. Use a device which supports the function of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys. The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's remote control have been changed. Set the “Remote Color Key” settings in the “Setup” menu to “Default” (p.98). En 110 Audio Problem No sound. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.82). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Main Zone Max Volume” or “Zone2 Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.94). A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.82). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.90). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.27) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.88). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform YPAO (p.27) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.90). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The playback source does not contain Low Frequency Effect (LFE) or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.89). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.27) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.88). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.91). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The volume cannot be increased. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). En 111 Problem Cause Remedy The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.19). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.91). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.92). Also, enable ARC on the TV. Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.82). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. DSD audio cannot be heard. DSD audio is selected as the input source for Zone2. Enable party mode to play DSD audio in Zone2 (p.77). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.96). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. En 112 Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No image (contents required the HDCP 2.2 -compatible HDMI device) from the playback device connected to the unit with HDMI. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV. The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.82). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.124). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV (HDMI input jack) does not support HDCP 2.2, or the playback device is connected to other than the HDMI 6 jack. (The Warning message can be displayed on the TV screen.) Connect the unit to the TV (HDMI input jack) that supports HDCP 2.2. Use the HDMI 6 jack to connect the playback device. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.19 to 20). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. En 113 FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-S601.) Problem Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.48). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Use an outdoor FM antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.48). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.48). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.49). Problem Cause Remedy No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.52). Reception strength of DAB radio is poor. Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.55), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. There is no DAB coverage in your area. Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of the DAB coverage in your area. There is multi-path interference. Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.55), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. DAB information is not available or is inaccurate. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may not provide information. Contact the DAB broadcaster. No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. DAB radio (RX-S601D) No DAB radio reception even after performing an initial scan. DAB radio reception is weak or noisy. En 114 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The unit does not detect the USB device. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.99). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.99). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.69). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.100). The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.69). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.100). The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.105). The mobile device does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay or AV CONTROLLER. The unit and the mobile device are connected to different SSID when using a multiple SSID router. Connect them to the Primary SSID (at the top of the list). The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. The unit does not detect the PC. The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). En 115 Problem Cause Remedy Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). Cause Remedy Wireless network is not found. Bluetooth Problem A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted during playback. The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.101). Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.60). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP. The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working for some reason. Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.60). The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit. The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.60). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. En 116 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.69). The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.61). Access error Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.24). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. No device The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. The network cable is not connected. Connect the network cable properly. Not connected The wireless router (access point) is not found. Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.104). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.69). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. Unable to play En 117 Glossary Audio information DTS-HD High Resolution Audio ■ Audio decoding format DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). Dolby Digital DTS-HD Master Audio Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD disc. DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). DTS Neo: 6 Dolby Pro Logic II DTS Neo: 6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). FLAC DTS 96/24 FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. MP3 DTS Digital Surround One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. MPEG-4 AAC DTS-ES An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray Disc). DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). En 118 HDMI and video information Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. WAV Deep Color Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ■ Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Network information Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. SSID SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. En 119 Yamaha technologies Supported devices and file formats CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) ■ Supported devices Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. ❑ BLUETOOTH devices • BLUETOOTH devices that support A2DP can be used. • Yamaha does not assure the connections of all BLUETOOTH devices. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. ❑ USB devices Compressed Music Enhancer • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. SILENT CINEMA • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. Virtual CINEMA DSP ❑ iPod Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Made for. iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) (as of July 2015) The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of July 2015) En 120 ■ File formats Video signal flow ❑ USB, PC/NAS File WAV * MP3 WMA MPEG-4 AAC FLAC ALAC AIFF DSD Sampling frequency (kHz) 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/ 176.4/192 32/44.1/48 32/44.1/48 32/44.1/48 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/ 176.4/192 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/ 176.4/192 2.8 MHz/ 5.6 MHz Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. quantization bit (bit) Number of Bitrate (kbps) channels Support for gapless playback 16/24 - 2 ✔ - 8 to 320 8 to 320 8 to 320 2 2 2 - 16/24 - 2 ✔ 16/24 - 2 ✔ Video device - 2 ✔ 1 - 2 - TV HDMI connection HDMI in HDMI 16/24 The unit HDMI out HDMI * Linear PCM format only HDMI HDMI Composite video connection • To play back FLAC files stored on your PC/NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. VIDEO in VIDEO • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. En 121 VIDEO VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. Information on HDMI For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. 1 2 Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. Operations available from the TV’s remote control a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. • Standby synchronization b Press SETUP. • Volume control including mute • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device SETUP OPTION SETUP • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) Cursor Cursor keys keys ENTER ENTER (Example) DISPLAY RETURN HDMI Control HDMI Control RED GREEN YELLOW L BLUE c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. The unit turns off (standby) Playback device also turns off Setup Turn off the TV Speaker HDMI Operations available from the unit’s remote control Sound ECO • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.42) Function Network Bluetooth Language • Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) d Press ENTER again. (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) Turns on and displays video from the playback device En 122 Configuration e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. Audio Return Channel (ARC) ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Configuration HDMI Control On Audio Output Auto Standby Through Auto TV Audio Input Standby Sync Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. 1 2 AV4 Auto ARC On SCENE Back: RETURN f If you made a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “TV Audio Input” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV 1”. Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 1”and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: – “ARC” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. g Press SETUP. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 5 6 7 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.19). • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. • “AV 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.42), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • If you reconnect the HDMI cable, perform the procedure 5-8 again. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. En 123 HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • 4K/60Hz (YCbCr4:2:0), 50Hz (YCbCr4:2:0) • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. En 124 Trademarks x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. (For RX-S601D) The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Android™ Google Play™ “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. iTunes, AirPlay,iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. This receiver supports network connections. Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is under license. Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK) HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved. En 125 Explanations regarding GPL This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website (http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/). Specifications Input jacks HDMI USB • Analog Audio • HDMI Features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory Audio x 4 • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD • Video Format (Repeater Mode) Optical x 1 - VGA Coaxial x 2 - 480i/60 Hz • Video Composite x 3 • HDMI Input HDMI x 6 • Other jacks - USB x 1 (USB2.0) - NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) - NETWORK (Wireless) x 1 (IEEE802.11b/g/n) Output jacks • Analog Audio - Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R) - Subwoofer Out x 1 - Headphone x 1 Composite x 1 • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 1 BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH version ...........................................Ver. 2.1+EDR Supported profile .............................................. A2DP, AVRCP - 576i/50 Hz Supported codec..................................................... SBC, AAC - 480p/60 Hz Wireless output ...................................... BLUETOOTH Class 2 - 576p/50 Hz Maximum communication distance - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz ............................................... 10 m (33 ft) without interference - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz Network - 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • PC Client Function • Audio Format • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 - Dolby TrueHD • AirPlay supported - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital • Internet Radio - DTS-HD Master Audio • Wi-Fi function - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method - DTS Express - Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection - DTS • Video • Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A and USB connection - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch - Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible (HDMI 6 jack: HDCP 2.2 compatible) Other jacks • Link Function: CEC supported • YPAO MIC x 1 TUNER • Analog Tuner [RX-S601 U.K. and Europe models] FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) [RX-S601 other models] FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) [RX-S601D U.K. and Europe models] DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) [RX-S601D other models] DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER) En 126 - Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode - Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz - Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) Front L/R .....................................................................100 W/ch H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround).................................12 dB/oct. Center.........................................................................100 W/ch L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct. Surround L/R ..............................................................100 W/ch (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) Front L/R .....................................................................125 W/ch Center.........................................................................125 W/ch • Post Decoding Format Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - DTS Neo: 6 Music, DTS Neo: 6 Cinema Audio Section • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................60 W+60 W (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................55 W+55 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W Center ............................................................................... 80 W Surround L/R...........................................................80 W+80 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................65 W+65 W Center ............................................................................... 65 W Surround L/R...........................................................65 W+65 W • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).....................................90/110/140/160 W • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω).............................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Signal AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................2.3 V • Output Level / Output Impedance SUBWOOFER........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................. 100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV 3 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AV 3 etc. (DIRECT) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out) ......................................................................... 108 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation Front L/R ...................................................................... 95 W/ch AV 3 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) Center ......................................................................... 95 W/ch ................................................................ 70 dB/50 dB or more Surround ...................................................................... 95 W/ch • Volume Control (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Front L/R ...................................................................... 80 W/ch Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB Center ......................................................................... 80 W/ch Surround L/R................................................................ 80 W/ch • Filter Characteristics (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω) • Tone Control Characteristics Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz En 127 Video Section General • Video Signal Type • Power Supply [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ............... NTSC [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Other models]................................................................... PAL [General model] .............AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Video Signal Level Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω • Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................50 dB or more FM Section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono................................................................................ 65 dB Stereo .............................................................................. 64 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) [China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [China and Asia models].................................................170 W [Other models] ................................................................190 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off .........................................................................................0.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby Off ........................................................1.4 W HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, Bluetooth Standby Off Wired ................................................................................1.7 W Wireless (Wi-Fi) ...............................................................1.7 W Wireless Direct .................................................................1.9 W Mono................................................................................. 0.5% HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On Stereo ............................................................................... 0.6% (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On ........................................1.7 W • Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced AM section (RX-S601) • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................................................. 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz DAB Section (RX-S601D) • Tuning Range ..........................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III) • Support Audio Format HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On .........................................................................................2.9 W • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] .............................................400 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ..................... 435 x 111 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 4-3/8” x 12-7/8”) • Reference Dimensions (with wireless antenna upright) ..................... 435 x 176 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 6-7/8” x 12-7/8”) * Including legs and protrusions • Weight .............................................................7.8 kg (17.2 lbs) .......................... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG 4 HE AAC v2 (AAC+) • Antenna .........................................................75 Ω unbalanced * Specifications are subject to change without notice. En 128 Index Symbols DAB/FM antenna connection 23 Decoder Off (front display information) 79 Dimmer (Front Display) 97 DIRECT 47 DLNA 71 DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) (DAB) 54 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 100 DSP Program (front display information) 79 Envelope icon (p) 84 Lock icon (o) 97 Numerics 2.1-channel system 2ch Stereo 45 4K Ultra HD 18 5.1-channel system 14 14, 16 E A Adaptive DRC 81 ADVANCED SETUP 103 AirPlay 64 AM antenna connection 23 AM radio 48 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 92, 123 Audio Decoder (front display information) Audio Mode (DAB) 54 Auto Power Standby 96 Auto Preset (FM radio) 49 AUX jack 8 ECO 96 Ensemble Label (DAB) 54 Equalizer 90 Error indication (front display) Extra Bass 47, 89 79 Banana plug 16 Bi-amp 17, 88 Bluetooth 60 Bookmark 74 Firmware update 105, 106 FM antenna connection 23 FM radio 48 FM radio tuning 56 Frequency (FM radio) 56 Frequency step setting 48, 104 Front display information 79 I CINEMA DSP 44 Clear Preset (DAB radio, Option menu) 54 Clear Preset (FM radio, Option menu) 58 Compressed Music Enhancer 47 Crossover 27, 89 INFO key 8 Initial scan (DAB radio) 52 Input (front display information) Input Trim 82 Internet radio 72 iPod content playback 61 iPod content playback (AirPlay) D 52 En 129 MAC Address 99, 100 Manual station preset (FM radio) Max Volume 94, 95 Memory Guard 97 Menu language selection 26 Multiple room playback 75 Multi-zone 75 Muting 41 57 N Option menu 80 P 124 C M O H HDCP 20, 113 HDMI signal compatibility Language 102 Lipsync 82, 94 NAS content playback 69 Network Connection 99 Network information 99 Network Name 100 Network Standby 100 F B DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) DAB information 54 117 L 79 Party mode 77 PEQ 90 PHONES jack 8 Power Amp Assign 88 Preset station selection (DAB radio) 53 Preset station selection (FM radio) 58 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 50 Program Type (DAB) 54 R 64 Radio Data System tuning 51, 59 Registering favorite items (shortcut) Remote control 11 Remote control sensor 8 78 Remote ID 104 Rename 100 Repeat 63, 68, 71 YPAO MIC jack 8 Z Zone2 speaker connection 17, 75 S SCENE 42, 92 Setup menu 84 Shortcut 78 Shuffle 63, 68, 71 Signal information 82 Sleep timer 11 Sleep timer (Zone2) 76 Sound program 44 Speaker impedance 13, 15, 103 Standby indicator (front panel) 8 Standby Through 91 Station preset (DAB radio) 53 Station preset (FM radio) 57 Straight decode 46 Subwoofer Trim 82 Surround decoder 46 T Test Tone 90 Tone Control 81 U USB jack 8 USB storage device content playback 66 V Video/audio input jack combination 21 Virtual CINEMA FRONT 14, 45, 89 Volume scale 94 W Wireless (Wi-Fi) Wireless Direct WPS 32, 34 32, 99 39, 99 Y YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 27 En 130 © 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH024B0/EN-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
Yamaha RX-S601 Handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- Handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-S601 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-S601 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha RX-S601 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha RX-S601 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha RX-S601 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-S601 Benutzerhandbuch
- dansk: Yamaha RX-S601 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha RX-S601 Ohjekirja
- svenska: Yamaha RX-S601 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-S601 Kullanım kılavuzu
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha CRX-330 Handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V500DOwner de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A1080 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A1070 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-AS710 de handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-A3080 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A2070BL Handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A870 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A880 de handleiding
